HERE
Cat. No. V074-E1-07
NS-Series
NS-NSDC1-V6
Note
1, 2, 3...
OMRON, 2002
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
P-1
Preliminary Material
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the NS-Designer.
The NS-Designer is a software package that enables creating and maintaining screen data for
OMRON NS-series Programmable Terminals.
To take full advantage of the NS-series Programmable Terminals, please be sure that you understand the functions and performance of the NS-Designer before attempting to use it. When using an
NS-series PT, please also refer to the
NS Series Setup Manual
and the
NS Series Programming
Manual.
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
•
•
•
•
Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
•
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
•
Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
•
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
• your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with
• double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the NS-Designer. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the NS-Designer and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation and operation.
P-2
Preliminary Material
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Notation and Terminology
The following notation and terminology are used in this manual.
The following notation is used in this manual.
Indicates additional information on operation, descriptions, or settings.
Note
♦
PT
PLC
In this manual, indicates an NS-series Programmable Terminal.
Indicates OMRON Programmable Controllers.
Host Indicates the PLC, FA computer, or personal computer functioning as the control device and interfaced with the NS-series PT.
P-3
Preliminary Material
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Related Manuals
The following manuals are used for NS-series PTs. (The boxes at the end of the catalog numbers indicate the revision code.)
This manual
•
@
Describes operating procedures for the NS-Designer, which is used to create the screens displayed on the PT and transfer them to the PT. It includes screen creation and transfer procedures. Refer to this manual for information on operating methods and detailed operating procedures.
This manual deals with details of NS-Designer operation. Refer to the following manuals for information on NS-series PT operation.
•
@
Describes the screen configurations, object functions, and host communications for the PT.
•
@
Provides information on NS Series -V1 models (i.e., NS12-V1, NS10-V1, NS8-V1, and NS5-V1), and
NS Series -V2 models (i.e., NS5-V2).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the
NS Series Programming Manual
([email protected] ) for information on PT functions and specific operating procedures.
•
This tutorial is designed for first-time users of NS-series PTs. It provides examples of operations from creating a simple screen through starting actual operation. When the NS-Designer is installed, the tutorial is installed on the hard disk as PDF files.
•
The online help for the NS-Designer contains detailed information on the NS-series macro functions.
The
Macro Reference
contains essentially the same information, and it is installed on the hard disk as
PDF Files when the NS-Designer is installed. Use either the online help or the
Macro Reference
, whichever is more convenient.
•
Refer to the operation manuals for individual PLC Units (e.g., the CPU Unit, Special I/O Units, CPU
Bus Units, Communications Units, etc) to obtain information on PLC functions and operation.
P-4
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED
USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS
OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH
CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE
PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
P-5
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:
•
•
•
Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property
.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY
WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS,
AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE
WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
P-6
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
P-7
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
i
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
ii
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
iii
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
iv
Contents
NS-Designer Operation Manual
v
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes the specifications and functions of the NS-Designer to provide a basic understanding of the capabilities of the NS-Designer for first-time users.
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-1 The NS-Designer
The NS-Designer is an application software package that can be run on Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or XP to create screen data for NS-series Programmable Terminals (referred to as "PTs").
The NS-Designer enables using a graphic Windows interface and Windows operating environment so that screens can be created simply and easily by practically anyone.
The data created on the NS-Designer consists of the following objects.
Data created on
NS-Designer
(project)
User screens Fixed objects
Functional objects
Sheets
Numeric units and scale settings
Alarm/event settings
Data log settings
Data block settings
Tables
Frames
Backgrounds
Fixed objects
Functional objects
Tables
Frames
Library
Rectangles
Circles/ovals
Lines
Polylines
Polygons
Sectors
Arcs
Buttons
Lamps
Display and input
Display
System clock
Alarms/events
Data block tables
Functional objects
Fixed objects
Functional objects
Tables
ON/OFF buttons
Word buttons
Command buttons
Bit lamps
Word lamps
Numeral display & input
String display & input
Thumbwheel switches
Temporary input
Text
List selections
Level meters
Bitmaps
Analogue meters
Broken-line graphs
Data log graphs
Video display
Dates
Times
Alarm/event displays
Alarm/event summaries and histories
1-1
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
User Screen
Fixed graphic
Frame
Functional object
Table
Functional object
Functional object
Overlaid
Sheet
1-1 The NS-Designer
Sheet objects
Windows
The following software and data are included with the NS-NSDC1-V @ .
•
•
NS-Designer Software
Transfer Program
Tool for transferring systems, projects, screens, and settings files.
•
Memory Card Transfer Tool
Tool for exchanging data with the Memory Card mounted to the PT.
•
•
•
•
NT631C Conversion Support Tool
CX-Server
PT System Program (replacement program)
Operation Manuals
The operation manuals include an
NS-series Macro Reference
, an
NS-Series Tutorial Manual
, and a
Host Connection Manual
.
•
Sample Data
Sample data of the screens created in the NS-series tutorial is included.
•
Switch Box Utility
Tool for helping to debug the operation of PLCs.
•
SAP (Smart Active Parts) Data
Libraries containing setting/monitor screens (e.g., for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers).
1-2
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-2 System Requirements
The following are required to use the NS-Designer.
Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better required.
IBM PC/AT or compatible capable of running the required OS.
64 Mbytes or more required. (Be sure to provide sufficient capacity, observing the recommend values for the OS.)
200 Mbytes or more recommended.
Required to install the NS-Designer.
VGA monitor required for DOS computers. A resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is recommended.
If the display resolution in the Windows screen properties is set to a lower setting, such as 640 x 480 pixels, portions of the NS-Designer windows may not be displayed. If this happens, increase the resolution. If large display fonts are used, not all of the text may fit in dialog boxes, preventing correct display. If this happens, use the small display fonts.
A mouse supported by the OS must be used.
Any of the following operating systems can be used: Microsoft Windows 95, Microsoft Windows 98,
Microsoft Windows Me, or Microsoft Windows NT (version 4.0, service pack 6a or higher), Microsoft
Windows 2000 (service pack 3 or higher), or Microsoft XP.
Microsoft Windows 3.1 is not supported.
Internet Explorer version 5.5 or higher is required.
RS-232C connection cable
Ethernet cable
Memory Cards
Refer to
Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications
for cable specifications.
1-3
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
A project contains all of the objects and settings required for a group of user screens.
The project name is specified to access data when editing on the NS-Designer or transferring data to
PT.
System setting for
PT operation
User screens
Password setting
Unit and scale setting
Library objects
Data log setting
Alarm/event setting
A wide variety of objects can be used as required to create screens.
Some of the objects that can be used are described below.
Fixed objects, which do not provide any input functions, can be created on a screen.
Although fixed objects can be set to flicker, they are otherwise displayed on the screen in a constant state.
Functional objects can be used to communicate with internal memory in the PT or with a PLC. Functional objects have both graphic and operational properties. The display of functional objects can be changed according to the status of the PT or PLC, and they can be used to input data through operations from the PT.
A table object provides multiple functional objects in a single table format.
A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the functional objects configuring each page can be switched based on PT or PLC status. Frames can contain fixed objects, functional objects, and tables.
A background is a graphic screen that is displayed as the background of other screens.
Bitmap files and JPEG files can be displayed as backgrounds.
Created objects can be registered in a library so that they can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens.
The following objects can be registered in the library.
Fixed objects, functional objects, tables, and frames
1-4
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
Data can be input to and output from a PLC using the following objects, enabling values in memory to be set or the screen data to be updated according to changes in memory.
Input
PT PLC
Output
Object Input Output
ON/OFF Button OK OK
Word Button
Command Button
Switch Screen
Key Button
OK
OK
Indirect Specification of Screens
OK
Indirect Specification of Character
Strings to Send
OK
OK
(Writing Screen Page Numbers)
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Numeral Display & Input
OK
OK
OK
OK
String Display & Input
Thumbwheel Switch
OK
OK
OK
OK
List Selection
Level Meter
Analogue Meter
Video Display
Broken-line Graph
Data Log Graph
Date/Time
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary & History
Data Block Table
Frames
Temporary input
(Indirect Reference of Display
Strings)
OK
(Address for specifying the File
Lines)
OK
(Indirect Specification of Display
Data)
OK
OK
(Specifying Display Update Bits)
(Specifying Number of Display Refreshes)
(Broken-line Monitor Address)
OK
(Monitor Address)
(Log Timing)
(Scale for Time Axis)
(Address for updating Display)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
(Writing Selected Line Number)
(Writing Selected Character Strings)
OK
(Writing Alarm Ids)
OK
1-5
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
PT memory is made up of internal memory and system memory.
The internal memory contained in the PT can be read and written by the user. Internal memory can be allocated as required for settings, such as the communications addresses of functional objects.
The internal memory is divided into two sections.
Memory Contents
$HB
$HW
Bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.
Up to 32 Kbits (32,768 bits) can be used.
Word memory is used to store numeral and character string data.
Each word contains 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings and 32-bit data.
Up to 32 Kwords (32,768 words) can be used.
Holding Bit Memory
Holding bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.
Up to 8 Kbits (8,192 bits) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power is turned OFF.
Holding Word Memory
Holding word memory is used to save numerical values and character-string data.
Each word consists of 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings with a user-defined length and 32-bit data.
Up to 8 Kwords (8,192 words) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power is turned OFF.
System memory is used to change information between the host and the PT, such as controlling the
PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system memory is divided into two sections.
$SB
$SW
Memory Contents
System Bit Memory
The system bit memory contains 52 bits with predefined functions.
System Word Memory
The system word memory contains 38 words with predefined functions.
1-6
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
PLC words and bits can be allocated as communications addresses for functional objects and other objects. To enable this, a name is registered for each PLC. This setting is called the host registration.
Refer to
1-3 Communicating with the Host
in the
NS series Programming Manual
for details on the host.
Communicates with address
10000 in host B
Communicates with address
10000 in host C
Communicates with address 10000 in host A
HOST A HOST B
HOST C
The following screens can be displayed on the PT: User screens with objects configured as required by the user, sheets, and system screens with predefined functions.
Screen type
User Screen
Base Screen
Pop-up Screen
Sheet
System Menu
Contents
Used to create normal screens.
Basic screens displayed during PT operation.
Pop-up screens can be displayed overlapping other screens.
Up to 3 pop-up screens can be displayed at the same time.
Sheets are screens used when the same images are to be displayed on more than one screen. They are used together with other screens, such as base screens and pop-up screens.
Up to 10 sheets can be created in each project.
The System Menu Screen is predefined and cannot be changed by the user. It is used to set or confirm various special functions of the PT, such as to initialize data or to access various histories.
1-7
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
Some details on the types of object that can be positioned on a screen are described below.
The following fixed objects can be used.
Rectangle
Circle/Oval
Straight Line or Arrow
Polyline
Polygon
Sector
Arc
1-8
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
The following functional objects can be used.
Icon Name
ON/OFF Button
Contents
Control the ON/OFF status of the specified write address. Any of four action types can be selected.
Word Button
Command Button
Set numeric data at the specified address. Values can also be increased and decreased.
Perform special processing, such as switching screens, controlling pop-up screens, controlling video, etc.
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Text
Turn ON and OFF according to the ON/OFF status of the specified address.
Light in 10 steps according to the value in the specified address (0 to
9).
Display the registered character string.
Numeral Display & Input
String Display & Input
List Selection
Numerically display the word data from the specified address and input data from a tenkey pad.
Display the character string from the word data from the specified address and input data from a keyboard.
Display the registered characters string in a list for selection.
①
Thumbwheel Switch
Analogue Meter
Level Meter
Broken-line Graph
Numerically display the word data from the specified address and increment and decrement the data when increment/decrement buttons are pressed.
Display graphs in three colors in circles, semi-circles or quarter circles for the word data at the specified address.
Display levels in three colors for the word data at the specified address.
Display a broken-line graph for the word data at the specified address.
Video Display
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary and History
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Temporary Input
Display images from video cameras and Vision Sensors.
Display alarms or events that have occurred in order of priority.
Display summaries or histories of alarms or events that have occurred.
Display and set date.
Display and set time.
Display trend graphs for the word data at specified addresses.
Writes to and reads from PLC preset recipe data, such as instructions for manufacturing process.
Display numerical values and character strings that have been input during creation of a tenkey or keyboard for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons.
1-9
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
The following functions can be conveniently used to make screens more effective.
Functional objects of the same type can be created as a group in a table.
Functional objects can be easily created and organized in a table simply by specifying the type of functional object, the number of rows, and the number of columns. Item names (text) can also be added to the cells of the table.
The properties of the functional objects can be set as a group, and addresses can be automatically allocated by setting offsets.
Refer to
Creating Tables
under
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
for more information.
Item names are created with Text objects
Functional objects: Numeral Display & Input objects
Number of horizontal items: 4
Number of vertical items: 3
Address, such as $W100,
$W101, $W102, etc., are allocated.
Common properties for all the
Numeral Display & Input objects are set at the same time.
A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the functional objects configuring each page can be switched using the page switching function of the frame. A frame can contain up to 256 frame pages, and objects can be pasted as required within each frame page.
Refer to
4-4 Frames
for details.
More than one functional object or fixed object can be defined as a group.
The group, which contains more than one functional or fixed object, can be rotated, flipped, or sized as if it were just one object.
Grouped objects can also be created with other functional or fixed objects or placed in other groups.
Refer to
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects
under
5-5 Layout Functions
for more information.
An object and all of its property settings can be registered as one object. Created objects registered in a library can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens. Refer to
5-13 Library
Registration and Sharing Objects
for details.
Setting and monitor screens (such as setting screens for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers) are pre-installed as standard library objects for the NS-Designer. For details, refer to
How to use Smart Active Parts
(PDF) included with the NS-Designer.
1-10
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
Specified fixed objects can be displayed for ON/OFF buttons, word buttons, bit lamps, and word lamps to create more graphic displays.
Object selected.
Object selected.
Fixed objects, which do not provide any functions themselves, can be drawn on a screen. The following fixed objects can be drawn. Rectangles, circles, ovals, straight lines, polylines, polygons, sectors, and arcs
General-purpose image data can be used as backgrounds for user screens. The following file types can be used.
•
Bitmap files (.BMP)
•
JPEG files (.JPG)
Displays can be switched to check the operation of screens created offline.
The following switching functions can be used.
Switching Screens
•
Switching Frame Pages
Edited frame pages can be switched forward and backward.
Refer to
Switching Frame Pages
under
4-4 Frames
for details.
•
Switching Screens
Edited screens can be switched forward and backward.
Refer to
Switching Screens
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
•
Zooming
Screens can be zoomed in and out.
Refer to
Zoom
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
Switching Object Displays
•
ID Displays
Object ID numbers can be displayed.
Refer to
Switching Items Displayed for Objects
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
•
Error Object Displays
Objects for which errors were detected in validating are displayed with red borders.
Refer to
Show ID
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
1-11
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
•
Displaying Sheet Objects
The sheet objects overlapped on base screens can be displayed.
Refer to
Show Sheet Object
under
Switching Items Displayed for Objects
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
Sheet Objects Hidden Sheet Objects Displayed
•
Displaying Switch Labels
The specified switch labels can be displayed.
Refer to
Switch Label
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
•
Simulating ON/OFF Status
The functional objects can be displayed in their ON status.
Refer to
Displaying ON Status
under
Switching Items Displayed for Objects
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
ON Status OFF Status
•
Displaying Addresses
The communications addresses set for each functional object can be displayed. Refer to
Show Address
under
Switching Items Displayed for Objects
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
Address Display
1-12
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
The stored data for specified addresses is displayed as a graph.
Up to 100 groups can be registered for each project. Up to 16 addresses can be registered for each group.
Up to 50 addresses can be registered for constant logging.
Addresses can be registered for alarm monitoring to provide notification for alarms from the specified addresses. Registration can also be used to display events, such as operation startup.
Alarm-related functional objects can be used to display alarms and events that have occurred or to display alarm/event histories.
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
•
•
•
•
•
Alarm 500
Up to 5,000 alarms can be registered.
Simple Display
List
1-13
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
Data blocks (recipes) enable reading/writing numeric values and character strings from/to memory areas, such as those in a PLC. Data blocks can be used to easily change the arrangement of the system.
Create the data in CSV files and store them in the PT beforehand. The created data can be used to make changes while operating the PT.
Examples: Setting the width (numeric value), height (numeric values), and color (character string) in the PLC (Refer to the figure shown below.)
Set width: 150, height: 54, and color: blue for product B.
Just by selecting product B, these three items can be set for the PLC. If product A is selected, a width of 100, height setting of 52, and a color setting of red will be set for the PLC.
Processing conditions for product B
(150, 54, blue) set in PLC
To controlled devices
Data block
Width
Product A
B
Height
Color
Red
Blue
Product
Yellow
Produ
Produ
Conditions for product B are selected and set in PLC.
Red
Blue
Product
B
Using data block, the user does not need to save the data in the PLC beforehand, so that memory of the PLC can be saved and ladder program can be reduced. Data blocks also have the following features.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data in CSV format can be edited and managed on a personal computer.
Data can be edited on the PT.
Data can be written to a Memory Card.
Data can be read from a Memory Card.
Processes values and character strings can be handled.
Maximum number of rows: 1,000. Maximum number of columns: 500. Data blocks with both 1,000 rows and 500 columns, however, cannot be set.
Refer to
2-16 Data Blocks - Restrictions for Data Blocks
in the
Programming Manual
for details.
1-14
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
Install a Video Input Unit (NS-CA001) on the PT to display the picture output from video devices such as a video camera or Vision Sensor on the PT. Up to four video devices can be connected to the PT.
There are two input methods: NTSC and PAL.
1
3
2
4
NTSC/PAL
4 ch
3 ch
2 ch
1 ch
1
2
3
4
Video camera or
Vision Sensor
1-15
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions
The property settings of functional objects can be edited as CSV files.
Export property settings to CSV files, edit them with a standard spreadsheet program or other editing tool, and then import them back into the NS-Designer to set the properties of functional objects.
Refer to
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
for details.
Editing in spreadsheet software
Importing
Functional object settings are checked according to validation items to see if any mistakes have been made.
Any errors that are detected are displayed in a list. The functional or fixed objects where errors exist can also be displayed.
Refer to
Section 9 Validation
for details.
1-16
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Screen data is created with the NS-Designer as follows:
Start NS-Designer.
Select PT model.
Open screen.
Make system settings.
Select in dialog box.
A screen is automatically opened when a new project is created.
Otherwise screens are opened with
File - Open Screen
Settings - System Setting
1-4 Outline of Operational Flow
Set project properties.
Set screen properties.
Settings - Project Properties
Settings - Screen Properties
Register host.
Lay out objects.
Save screen data.
Save project.
Check project by printing data.
Check object operation with test tool.
Transfer data to PT.
Settings - Register Host
File - Save Screen
File - Save Project
File - Print
Tools - Test
File – Transfer Data
Note
♦
Start actual operation only after sufficiently checking the operation of the screen data and host programming.
1-17
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-5 Menu Commands
The commands that appear on the pull-down menus of the NS-Designer and their functions are described in the following tables.
File Menu
Command
New Project
Open Project
Save Project
Save Project As
Template
Project Maintenance
New Screen
Open Screen
Close Screen
Save Screen
Save All
Open Sheet
Apply Sheet
Import CSV File
Export CSV File
Transfer Data
Recent Projects
Exit
Function
Creates a new project.
Opens an existing project.
Saves the current project (overwrites the existing file).
Saves the current project under a specified name.
Specifies a template project.
Copies, deletes, backs up, and restores projects.
Creates a new screen under the current project.
Opens an existing screen in the current project.
Closes the screen currently being edited.
Saves the current screen.
Saves (overwrites) all of the data for the current project.
Creates new sheet or edits a sheet.
Sets a screen with overlapping sheets.
Imports project or screen data saved in CSV format to the current project or screen.
Exports the current project or screen data to a file in CSV format.
Downloads screen data created on the NS-Designer to the PT or uploads screen data from the PT to the NS-Designer.
Outputs current project or screen information to a printer or to a file. Select
to display a preview.
Displays a list of currently edited projects. (Up to four projects are displayed.)
Ends the NS-Designer.
Edit Menu
Command
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Offset Paste
Delete
Find
Replace
Select All
Repeat
Function
Discards changes and restores the previous status.
Restores the changes discarded with
Undo.
Deletes the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.
Copies the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.
Pastes objects that have been cut or copied.
Pastes objects that have been cut or copies with offset addresses.
Deletes the selected objects.
Searches for functional objects using addresses or character strings as keywords.
Replaces addresses set for functional objects.
Selects all objects on a screen or all functional or fixed objects of a specific type.
Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically.
1-18
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
View Menu
Command
Toolbars
Status Bar
Switch Label
Previous Screen
Next Screen
Previous Frame Page
Next Frame Page
Simulate ON/OFF
Show ID
Show Address
Show Error Object
Show Sheet Object
Show Touch Points
Zoom
Refresh
1-5 Menu Commands
Function
Displays and hides the toolbars.
(Standard, functional object, fixed object, operation, formatting, color, and address settings)
Displays and hides the status bar.
Switches to the specified label display.
Displays the previous screen.
Displays the next screen.
Displays the previous frame page.
Displays the next frame page.
Switches functional objects between ON and OFF status displays.
Displays and hides ID numbers for objects.
Displays and hides address displays for functional objects.
Displays and hides error marks for objects.
Switches the display of objects registered in sheets.
Displays the touch points on the PT.
Zooms the display in and out.
Redraws the screen.
Functional Objects Menu
Command
ON/OFF Button
Function
Starts creation of an ON/OFF button.
Word Button
Command Button
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Text
Numeral Display & Input
String Display & Input
List Selection
Thumbwheel Switch
Analogue Meter
Level Meter
Broken-line Graph
Bitmap
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary &
History
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Video Display
Frame
Table
Temporary Input
Starts creation of a word button.
Starts creation of a command button.
Starts creation of a bit lamp.
Starts creation of a word lamp.
Starts creation of text.
Starts creation of a number display and input object.
Starts creation of a string display and input object.
Starts creation of a list selection object.
Starts creation of a thumbwheel switch.
Starts creation of an analogue meter.
Starts creation of a level meter.
Starts creation of a broken-line graph.
Starts creation of a bitmap.
Starts creation of an alarm/event display object.
Starts creation of an alarm/event summary & history.
Starts creation of a data object.
Starts creation of a time lamp.
Starts creation of a data log graph.
Starts creation of a data block table.
Starts creation of a video display.
Starts creation of a frame region.
Starts creation of a table on a table creation screen.
Starts creation of a temporary input.
1-19
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-5 Menu Commands
Fixed Objects Menu
Command
Rectangle
Circle/Oval
Straight line
Polyline
Polygon
Sector
Arc
Settings Menu
Command
Object Properties
Edit Label
Function
Starts creation of a rectangle.
Starts creation of a circle or oval.
Starts creation of a straight line.
Starts creation of a continuous straight line.
Starts creation of a polygon.
Starts creation of a pie-shaped sector.
Starts creation of an arc.
Change Settings at Once
Flicker Setting
Password Setting
Unit/Scale Setting
Alarm/Event Setting
Data Log Setting
Data Block Setting
Change Input Order
Project Properties
Screen Properties
System Setting
Reset Defined Default
Change PT Model
Register Host
Function
Sets the properties of the selected functional object.
Enables direct editing of labels on the screen without opening a property dialog box.
Enables editing the basic properties of the selected functional objects in a table.
Functional objects can be added and deleted as well.
Sets the flicker operation parameters.
Sets the password.
Displays the unit and scale conversions for a numeral display.
Set the alarm function (addresses, messages, etc.).
Set the data log function (e.g., data log groups).
Performs registration and correction of data blocks.
Sets the order for shifting the focus for objects that can be input.
Sets the project properties.
Sets the screen properties.
Sets the PT operating parameters.
Resets all of the settings made for an object. (Functional and fixed objects)
Sets the model of the NS-series PT.
Registers the host.
Layout Menu
Command
Align/ Distribution
Make Same Size
Function
Aligns the position of more than one selected object. (Left, Center in a Column,
Right, Top, Center in a Row, Bottom, Distribute Horizontally, or Distribute Vertically)
Sizes all selected objects horizontally and vertically to the same size as that of the largest or smallest object.
Moves the selected object to the front or back.
Moves the selected object one bit or one grid unit up, down, right, or left.
Rotates or flips an object. (90 Degrees Clockwise, 90 Degrees Counterclockwise,
Flip Vertical, Flip Horizontal, Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame, Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of Screen/Frame, Flip
Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame, or Flip Vertical Around Center of
Screen/Frame)
Edits the shape of a fixed object. (Edits, adds, or deletes nodes.)
Groups objects.
Ungroups a group of objects.
Sets the grid.
Order
Nudge
Rotate/Flip
Modify
Group
Ungroup
Grid
1-20
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0
Tools Menu
Command
Screen Maintenance
Sheet Maintenance
Validation
Validation Result
Functional Object List
List Up Functional Objects
Used
List Up Addresses Used
Address Cross Reference
Edit Background Bitmap
Register Library
Use Library
Test
Resource Report
Options
Function
Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces screen page numbers for screens in a project.
Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces sheet page numbers for sheets in a project.
Performs an error check on object settings.
Displays the results of validation.
Displays a list of functional objects on screen with property settings.
Displays the number of times functional objects are used in screens, screen pages that are not used, and frame pages in a tree format.
Displays a list of addresses that are used.
Displays a list of functional object IDs when addresses are used.
Edits the background.
Registers functional objects in the library and performs maintenance.
Paste functional objects registered in the library.
Performs operating test on the computer without connecting to a PLC.
Displays a report on the resources that have been used.
Sets optional functions.
Window Menu
Command
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
Function
Cascades the screen editing windows.
Tiles the screen editing windows.
Arranges the minimized window icons.
Help Menu
Command
Contents
Search for Help on
How to Use Help
About NT631
Conversion Support Tool
Function
Displays the contents for the online help.
Displays a search dialog box for help topics.
Displays information on using Help.
Displays information on the version of NS-Designer.
The NS-Designer Version 3.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
Screen data transfer through PLCs
Switch Box Screen
Multiple language support
Function
Enables transferring screen data to NS Hardware through a PLC and transferring ladder program to the PLC through the NS Hardware.
Displays I/O status of addresses on the NS Hardware. Addresses and their comments can be reused from a ladder program using the Switch Box Utility.
Multiple languages (Simplified Chinese, Korean, Traditional Chinese, etc.) can be displayed on user screens.
Enables performing video captures using system memory ($SW24) as a trigger. Video capture using a PLC trigger
Enhanced parts List
Reading CLK status
Macro to set time
Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time
Vastly increased library objects for use as buttons and lamps.
Displays status of CLK Board attached with NS Hardware on the screen.
Automatically sets the time, which as set manually before.
Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time.
1-21
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0
The NS-Designer Version 4.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
Equipped with USB port as a standard feature.
Function
Equipped with a USB port as a standard feature enabling display contents to be printed using USB-compatible general-purpose color printers (e.g., Canon or
Epson printers).
BMP and JPEG images can now be displayed using up to 32,000 colors. Display possible in up to
32,000 colors.
Screen data capacity greatly increased.
High-speed drawing
The data capacity has increased from 4 Mbytes to 20Mbytes.
The drawing speed is twice that of existing OMRON products.
The NS-Designer Version 5.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
NS5-series models added.
Object forms can be selected by user.
Windows fonts can be used in Button and Lamp objects.
Continuous input can be received from Bar Code
Reader.
Ver. 1.X projects can be created and edited.
Function
Added NS5-SQ0 (B) -V1 with compact 5.7-inch STN color display.
The forms of ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, and Word Lamp objects can now be specified as BMP or JPEG image files.
The labels used in ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, and
Command Button objects can now be specified using Windows fonts.
Input order of numeric values and character strings can now be controlled, allowing continuous input from a bar code reader.
NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 can be used to create and edit projects for NS System Ver.
1.X.
The NS-Designer Version 6.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
A PT model added.
Transfer program functions added.
Data log function expanded.
Video captures can be read from the memory card.
Appearance of command buttons can be specified.
Function
Added NS8-TV1 (B)-V1.
Screen data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT via modem.
Installing a CLK board in the personal computer enables screen data to be transferred. CX-Server compatibility has also simplified settings required for data transfer.
The number of always logging points has been increased from 5,000 to 50,000 points, and logging data can be automatically saved to the memory card. Saved
CSV files can be read and displayed overlapping the log graph with a reference.
Image data saved in the memory card can be specified from a list and displayed.
The list can be called using the command buttons or from the system menu.
Temporary input object added.
The storage format of numeric values in system memory can be selected.
The appearance of command buttons can be specified as round buttons. BMP and JPEG image files can be specified for button appearance. Write confirmation messages can also be set.
Objects for temporarily displaying input numerical values or character strings are provided for use when creating tenkeys or keyboards for Numerical Display &
Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons. Temporary input objects can also be used to display maximum and minimum values.
The numerical value storage format for system memory can be selected from
BCD and binary.
1-22
Section 1 Overview
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2
Supplement/
Enhancement
The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files for functional objects can be selected.
The number of alarms has been increased.
Macros FOR, NEXT,
CONTINUE, and BREAK have been added.
Label application function for importing CSV files has been added.
System memory functions have been added.
Function
The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files set using functional object properties can be selected from BCD and binary.
The maximum number of alarms that can be registered has been increased to
5,000.
Loop processing can be performed using macros. This improves efficiency of macro creation.
When importing CSV files, the character properties for a specified label name can be applied to the character properties for another label. This function is useful when setting multiple labels.
The following flags have been added:
PT battery low flag
PT memory card free space check flag
Memory card power OFF bit
Memory card removing status
Video capture start bit
Video capture executing flag
Video capture results flag
Periodical Data Log Save in process flag
Print screen/video capture switching bit
The NS-Designer Version 6.2 is supplemented and enhanced by the following main functions.
Supplement/
Enhancement
PT models added
Project trigger macro added
Data block control functions added to command buttons
Added items to system memory
Function
Added NS5-SQ0 -V2, NS5-TQ0 -V2, and NS5-MQ0 -V2.
Setting the macro to execute when the bit or value at a specified address changes has been enabled.
Data block control functions have been added to command buttons to enable reading/writing between CSV files and PLC memory, CVS files and PT memory, and PT memory and PLC memory when a button is pressed or a specified address turns ON while the command button is displayed.
The following have been added to system memory: data block control complete flag, internal holding bit/word memory ($HB/$HW) initialization flag, and data block error number.
Added arrows
Expanded Alarm/Event
Summary & History
Added program transfer function
Added installation method
Added startup method
Arrow heads can be added to the start and/or end of straight lines.
The titles of each display item can now be displayed on the top line. Also, alarm messages that are not completely displayed can be touched to display them in a message box.
Screen data transfer to the PT from a personal computer has been enabled using a USB cable.
NS-Designer can be installed from the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
Startup has been enabled by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the CX-Integrator
Network Configuration Window and selecting
Start Special Application
. If
Start with Settings Inherited
is selected, startup through to new project creation will be automatically executed.
1-23
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The NS-Designer software must be installed in the computer when using the NS-Designer for the first time.
The NS-Designer is application software designed to be operated on Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or
XP.
Use the following procedure to install, start, and exit the NS-Designer when Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me,
2000, or XP is already installed in the computer.
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer
Before installing the NS-Designer, check that the following requirements have been met. g
Monitor
VGA monitor or better.
Resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is recommended for optimum use of NS-
Designer.
g
CD-ROM Drive
Required to install the
NS-Designer.
g
Mouse
A mouse that supports
Microsoft Windows.
g
Computer
IBM PC/AT or compatible with Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0 (SP6a or higher), Me, 2000 (SP3 or higher), or XP installed
System Requirements
•
•
•
•
CPU
Recommended memory
Hard disk
Internet Explorer
Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better
64 Mbytes or more
200 Mbytes or more available disk space
Version 5.5 or higher
2-1
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
Install the NS-Designer in the hard disk.
To install the NS-Designer, execute the installation program provided.
For details on procedures for installing the NS-Designer from CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package, refer to the
CX-One Setup Manual
provided with CX-One.
Cat. No.
W444
Model
CXONE-AL @@ C-E
Manual name
CX-One Setup Manual
Contents
Installation and overview of CX-One FA
Integrated Tool Package.
Reference
♦
If the NS-Designer was previously installed from the CX-One and it’s necessary to install it from the individual NS-Designer CD-ROM, always uninstall the NS-Designer using the following procedure before installing it from its individual CD-ROM. The NS-Designer will not operate properly if it is installed without first uninstalling it.
1. Insert the CX-One installation disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select the Option to enable modifying the Support Software that is installed.
3. In the Select Features Dialog Box, clear the selection of only the NS-Designer. Do not change any other selections.
4. Continue by following the instructions in the dialog boxes to modify the installation and uninstall
NS-Designer.
5. Once the NS-Designer uninstallation process has been completed, place the individual CD-ROM disk for the NS-Designer into the CD-ROM drive and install the NS-Designer. (See note.)
Note: If the version of the CX-Server bundled on the individual NS-Designer CD-ROM is lower than the version of the CX-Server bundled with the CX-One, install only the NS-Designer and NOT the CX-Server. (A message will be displayed if the version is lower.) If a version of CX-Server that is lower than the version with the CX-One is installed, the CX-One will not operate properly.
The main buttons that are displayed during installation are as follows:
Confirms the settings in the window displayed and moves to the next window.
Cancels the settings in the window displayed and returns to the previous window.
Closes the window currently being displayed. The settings in the window are cancelled.
Installation can be cancelled by pressing this button in the installation window. A confirmation message will be displayed.
The actual folder configuration is displayed in a tree format, from which the folders where installation files are to be installed can be selected.
2-2
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
1. Start up Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or XP.
2. Close all applications before executing installation. Place the NS-Designer CD-ROM in the
CD-ROM drive. The setup program is started automatically. If the setup program does not start automatically, such as after executing uninstall, locate Setup.exe in the CD-ROM using Windows
Explorer, and then double-click the file to execute the setup program.
Reference
♦
If NS-Designer Ver. 2.X, 3.X, 4.X, 5.X, or 6.X is already installed, a dialog box to confirm deletion of this version will be displayed. Click the OK Button to start deleting this version. To exit the setup program, click the Cancel Button and then click the Exit Button.
FinsGateway and CX-Server will not be uninstalled by this operation.
3. The NS-Designer Setup Wizard will be displayed.
Install the NS-Designer by following the instructions in the Setup Wizard.
4. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage.
5. When NS-Designer installation has been completed, a message to confirm installation of Smart
Active Parts will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to start the installation. If Smart Active Parts installation is not required, click the
No
Button and proceed to step 10.
Smart Active Parts are libraries containing setting/monitoring screens (e.g., Position Control Unit setting screens and Temperature Controller monitoring screens).
6. The following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Next
Button.
2-3
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7. The Setup Type Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the setup type and click the
Next
Button. If
Complete
is selected, proceed to step 9.
8. The dialog box for selecting features will be displayed. Select the Smart Active Parts to be installed and click the
Next
Button.
9. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage. When installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Finish
Button.
10. A message will be displayed to confirm installation of the CX-Server. Click the
Yes
Button.
11. The following screen for installing the CX-Server will be displayed.
2-4
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
12. Click the
Next
Button. The screen for specifying the installation destination will be displayed.
13. Click the
Next
Button. If the following message is displayed, click the
OK
Button to continue installation.
CX-Server installation followed by installation of CX-Server Driver management tools will begin, and the installation program will automatically copy the CX-Server and CX-Server Driver management tools files to the specified directory.
14. When installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Select whether or not to restart the computer immediately, and click the
Finish
Button to complete the installation.
Always restart the computer before using NS-Designer.
Reference
♦
When installing NS-Designer in Windows NT, 2000, or XP, log onto the computer as the administrator to ensure that system DLL files can be overwritten. If overwriting system DLL files fails,
NS-Designer may not operate properly.
♦
When adding Smart Active Parts after installation of NS-Designer, double-click the CD-ROM directory \SmartActiveParts\Setup.exe from Windows Explorer to execute the setup program. Select all the Smart Active Parts to be used in the dialog box for selecting components.
♦
Refer to the
How to manage after conversion
file in the Programs Folder under the Windows Start
Menu for details after NT31C/NT631C Conversion Support Tool conversion.
♦
Internet Explorer Ver 5.5 or higher is required to transfer data.
2-5
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
The folder structure after installation is as follows:
NS-Designer
bldparts
intaparts
BMP files
Manual
Sample Project Data
Tutorial
Macro
Operation
Setup
Programming
Smart Active Parts
RGB_Video (NS-CA002)
PartsLib
Smart Active Parts
Smart Active Parts Mini
runparts
System
NS12_V1
NS12
V3_x
NS10_V1
NS10
V3_x
NS8_V1
NS7
V3_x
NS5_V1_V2
RecoverUpdate_6_2
RecoverUpdate_3_x
NT631C_Cnv
Readme_E.txt
Parts Collection (bitmaps)
Directory containing manuals
Sample project data for tutorial
How to use Smart Active Parts
Host Connection Manuals (Temp. Controller and Memory Links/Host Links)
NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit Manual
Smart Active Parts for NS8/NS10/NS12
Smart Active Parts for NS5
Ver. 3.x system program for NS12
Ver. 3.x system program for NS10
Ver. 3.x system program for NS7
Ver. 6.2 recovery/update program
Ver. 3 recovery/update program
Directory containing NT31C/NT613C Conversion Support Tool
Please read. (Contains precautionary information.)
2-6
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
1. When uninstalling the NS-Designer or CX-Server, click the Windows
Start
Button and select
Settings - Control Panel
.
2. Double-click
Add/Remove Applications
.
2-7
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
3. Select NS-Designer or CX-Server from the displayed list of applications, and click the
Add/Remove
Button.
4. When the NS-Designer has finished being uninstalled, a message will be displayed indicating that the uninstall operation has been completed. Check the message and then click the
OK
Button.
2-8
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
Install the NS-series USB driver in the personal computer. After installation, data can be transferred between the personal computer and NS-series PT via USB.
♦
With NS-V1 Series models, make sure that the PT has a lot number that supports USB transmission. The system program version of the NS-series PT must also support USB transmission. For details, refer
to 3-3-2 Connecting
via USB in the
NS series Setup Manual
(Cat. No. V083).
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP
Windows 2000 and Windows XP:
1. Start Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.
The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the
Next
Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select
Search for the best driver for my device (Recommended)
.
Click the
Next
Button.
4. Select only and then click the
Next
Button.
2-9
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
the Button, and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win2k_XP\Omron_NS.inf
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
the Button to display the following dialog box. Click the
Next
Button to start installing the
USB driver.
7. When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Finish
Button.
2-10
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
Windows 98 and Windows Me:
1. Start Windows 98 or Windows Me.
2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.
The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the
Next
Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select
Search for the best driver for your device
(Recommended)
.
Click the
Next
Button.
4. Select only and then click the
Browse
Button and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_DEV.inf the Button.
2-11
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
the Button to start installation.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Finish
Button.
7. The Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed again. Click the
Next
Button.
8. The following dialog box will be displayed. Check that
Search for the best driver for your device
(Recommended)
is selected, and then click the
Next
Button.
9. Select only and then click the
Browse
Button and specify the following file.
NS-Designer installation directory
\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_COM.inf
10. Click the
Next
Button.
2-12
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
11. Click the
Next
Button to start installation.
When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Finish
Button.
2-13
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-3 Starting the NS-Designer
To start the NS-Designer, click the Windows
Start
Button, and then select
Programs - Omron –
CX-One - NS-Designer - NS-Designer Ver X
(The items displayed may vary according to the program folder specified during installation.), right-click the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window of CX-Integrator, and select
Start Special Application - Start Only
.
When the NS-Designer startup is completed, the Main Window will be displayed, as follows:
♦
♦
More than one copy of the NS-Designer application can be run at the same time.
To start NS-Designer, log in as the administrator when using a personal computer running Windows
NT, 2000, or XP.
2-14
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer
•
Use one of the following operations to exit the NS-Designer.
•
•
•
•
Select
Exit
from the File Menu.
Click the
Close
Button at the top right of the Main Window.
Double-click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window.
Click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window and select
Menu Box.
Press the
Alt + F4
Keys.
Close
from the Control
If the project data that is open has not been saved, a confirmation message will be displayed.
When the NS-Designer is exited, the system will return to the Windows screen.
2-15
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-5 User Interface
The configuration and names and functions of the components in the NS-Designer operation screen are described here.
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbars
Screen being created
Status bar
The title bar displays the application name, project name, and screen number.
Separates the functions into related groups.
Each group name is displayed in the menu bar and the functions are displayed in pull-down menus under each group name.
Standard Toolbar
This toolbar displays frequently used functions as icons.
Create
New
Project
Save
Project
Open
Screen
Cut Paste Redo
Open
Project
Create
New
Screen
Save
Screen
Copy Undo Zoom About
NS-Designer
2-16
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Functional Objects Toolbar
Displays screen creation functions for functional objects as icons. Select the icon button of the functional object to be used in creating the screen to start screen creation.
ON/OFF
Button
Word
Button
Command
Button
Bit
Lamp
Word
Lamp
Text
String Display
& Input
Numeral
Display &
Input
List
Selection
Thumbwheel
Switch
Level
Meter
Analogue
Meters
Broken-line
Graph
Bitmap
Alarm/Event
Summary &
History
Alarm/Event
Display
Date
Time
Data Block
Table
Data Log
Graph
Video Display
Temporary
Input
Frame
Table
Fixed Objects Toolbar
Displays fixed object drawing functions as icons. Select the icon button for the fixed object to be drawn and start drawing.
Rectangle
Straight
Polygon
Circle/Oval
Line
Polyline
Arc
Sector
Operations Toolbar
Displays frequently used functions from the View and Tools Menus as icons.
Show Error Object
Show ID
Bring to
Front
Previous
Screen
Previous
Previous
Frame Page
Label
Find
Validation
Result
List Up
Addresses
Used
Register
Library
Simulate
ON/OFF
Show Sheet
Object
Show Address
Send to
Back
Next Screen
Next Frame
Page
Next
Label
Functional
Object List
Address Cross
Reference
Use
Library
List Up Functional
Objects Used
2-17
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Colors Toolbar
Displays the color settings for functional objects and fixed objects as icons.
2-5 User Interface
Color 1
Copy/Paste Color 2
Color
Color 3 Color 4
The Copy/Paste Color Button can be used to copy the display color of a functional object or fixed object and paste it into another functional object or fixed object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a batch without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.
1. Select the functional object or fixed object with the color to be copied. the Button to copy the color and change the appearance of the cursor to the following.
3. Click over the functional object or fixed object where the color is to be pasted. The Paste
Color/Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
To paste colors to multiple functional objects or fixed objects, select the functional objects or fixed objects that are going to be edited by enclosing them with the cursor.
4. Select the items to be pasted and click the
Paste
Button.
Reference
♦
The names of the items displayed as Color 1, Color 2, Color 3, and Color 4 in the Color Toolbar vary with the selected functional object and object settings.
Examples: Selecting rectangle, 2-light as the button type for ON/OFF Buttons.
Selecting circle/oval (fixed object).
2-18
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-5 User Interface
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Font Properties Toolbar
This toolbar displays the font properties setting functions for text in functional objects as icons.
Copy/Paste
Font
Font
Font Size
Font Color
Bold
Italic
Align
Left
Align
Right
Center in a
Row
Center in a Column
Align
Top
Align
Bottom
The Copy/Paste Font Properties Button can be used to copy the text properties set for a functional object and paste them into another functional object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a batch without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.
1. Select the functional object with the text properties to be copied. the Button to change the appearance of the cursor to the following.
3. Click over the functional object where the text attributes are to be pasted. The Paste Text Attribute
Dialog Box will be displayed.
To paste text attributes to multiple functional objects, select the functional objects that are going to be edited by enclosing them with the cursor, as shown below.
4. Select the items to be pasted and click the
Paste
Button.
Reference
♦
When raster fonts (font names: fine, standard, and rough) are selected, the bold and italic styles in the toolbar cannot be used.
Refer to
Text Attributes
under
2-8 Common Functional Object Functions
in the
NS Series Programming Manual
for details.
2-19
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-5 User Interface
Address Toolbar
Displays the setting functions for the addresses of the functional objects in a toolbar. Select the functional object for which the address is to be set and set the address.
Using this toolbar, address settings can be edited and changed without having to open a properties dialog box for the settings.
Displays the set address.
Displays the address type.
When a functional object has multiple address settings, select the address type from the combo box and then set each address.
Clicking this button displays the
Address Setting Dialog Box from which the address can be set.
Selections for ON/OFF Buttons
Reference
♦
Another method for setting addresses apart from directly inputting from the keyboard, is to input the address from the Address Settings Dialog Box that is displayed by clicking the Settings Button.
Refer to
5-7 Address Settings
for details.
These screens are used to create the screens displayed on the PT.
Status Bar
The status bar displays an explanation of the function or object where the cursor is positioned or which is selected.
Displays information on the function of the toolbar icon or menu item selected.
Displays the frame page number currently selected.
Displays the object name currently selected.
Displays the switch label name currently selected.
Displays the current coordinates of the cursor.
Displays the upper left coordinates of the object.
Displays the current zoom status.
Displays the selected NS-
Designer system i
Displays the PT model currently selected
2-20
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2-5 User Interface
Reference
♦
The toolbars and status bar can be set to be shown or hidden.
Toolbar: Select
View - Toolbars
and then
Standard
,
Functional Object
,
Fixed Object
,
Operation
,
Formatting
,
Color
, or
Address
.
Status Bar: 1. Select
View
- Status Bar
.
A check symbol before an item indicates that the item is displayed.
♦
The toolbars can be moved to any position on the screen.
Please the cursor on any part other than a button, and drag the toolbars to the desired location.
Dialog boxes are used to set detailed settings for executing PT functions.
Edit Box
Enter the character string. If there is a spin button , click the Up Arrow
Button to increase or decrease numerical values.
Option Buttons
Button or Down Arrow
Item names with a circle to their left are optional items.
From the multiple optional items, only one item can be selected. The selected item will be indicated by a black dot.
2-21
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Combo Box
2-5 User Interface
A list of multiple optional items will be displayed in a drop-down menu. Select the items to be set from the list.
List View
Select the item from the list.
Check Boxes
Item names with a square on their left side are the optional items.
Select whether or not to enable the item. The selected items are indicated with a check mark.
2-22
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes the basic operations for manipulating projects where data created for screens is stored.
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-1 Projects
The NS-Designer designates and handles PT screen data as one project. A project consists of data that can be broadly divided into project folders where files such as bitmap files and project files (extension.ipp) are stored.
Sample pnlpg###.ipw(### = 000-F9F) pnlpg###.ipw(### = FFF-FF6) unitcom.txt
message.jpm
pnlalarm.alm
datalog.cfg
datalog.cfg
*.bmp*1, *.jpg*1
*.csv
*.ini*1
1, *.jpg*1
*.txt*1
*.lst*1
*.vec
print.cfg*2 errlist.txt*3
*.csv*2 log
*.log*2 sample.ipp
Screen file
Sheet file
Unit and scale setting file
Write confirmation message file
Alarm/event setting file
Data log setting file
Host setting file
Bitmaps and JPEG files for displaying background and bitmap objects
Data block data files
Communications conditions setting file
Text files for displaying text objects and indirectly specifying character strings
Text files for list selection object display and storing character strings
Figure specification graphic data files
Print setting files
Validation result files
Logging files
Internal logging files
Project files
Note 1. The user can edit these files with a text editor. The other files are created by NS-Designer and must not be edited using a text editor or other means. to the PT.
3.
These files are created when validating and are not transferred when transferring data to the PT.
When files are saved under the name Sample, a file named Sample.IPP will be created in a folder called Sample under \Temp\ in the NS-Designer install directory. To open an existing project, select the file with the IPP extension.
Reference
♦
To move or copy the project data to a floppy disk or other storage area, select both the folder and project file, and execute the operation. The project consists of these two data types and cannot be opened if only one of them is selected.
3-1
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-2 Creating New Projects
The procedures for operations from creating new projects to opening screens are described here.
1. Select
File - New Project
or click the
New Project
Button in the toolbar.
Reference
♦
Projects that were created with NS-Designer Ver. 2.0 or later cannot be run on PTs using system
Ver. 1.X. Install NS-Designer Ver. 1.X to create projects. Projects for system Ver. 1.X can be created or edited, however, when using NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later.
2. The New Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the NS-series PT model and System Version and click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
The project system versions that can be run depend on the system program version installed in the
PT. Refer to
Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
for details.
♦
The NS-Designer can also be started by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window of the CX-Integrator and selecting
Start Special Application
-
Start with Settings Inherited
.
3. The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed. Select
New Screen
or
Reuse Existing Screen
and click the
OK
Button. Refer to
Creating New Screens
under
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
for details.
4. Screen creation starts after new screen is opened.
3-2
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
1. Select
File - Open Project
or click the
Open Project
Button in the toolbar.
2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the project file (IPP extension) and click the
Open
Button.
1. Double-click on an IPP file from Windows Explorer to display the Open Screen Dialog Box. the Button.
3-3
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
Reference
♦
Screen data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 2.X can be converted using the
NS-Designer’s Settings Menu. The procedure for converting to NS-Designer Ver. 6.X screen data is given below.
1. Open the NS-Designer Ver. 2.X data in NS-Designer Ver. 6.X.
2. Select
Settings – Conversion – Project – To Ver6.2
. This will convert the data to NS-Designer
Ver. 6.2 data.
∗
Converting screen data for the NS7 to NS-Designer Ver. 6 or higher data will convert it as data for the NS8-TV1 @ -V1.
∗
∗
Depending on the combination of system program, NS-Designer version, and data version, it may not be possible to use converted data. Refer to
Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
.
NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later can also convert screen data created with NS-Designer Ver. 1.X.
Reference
♦
Project data created with NS-Designer from Ver. 1.X to Ver. 5.X can be edited and saved on
NS-Designer Ver. 6.X.
If project data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver.
6.X, the following data conversion confirmation message, which indicates making a copy of the data for Ver. 1.1 will be displayed.
If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the following dialog box will be displayed and the data will be resaved as Ver. 1.1 data under the specified project name.
If the
No
Button is clicked, the project will not be read or converted.
3-4
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The methods for saving project files are described here.
1. Select
File - Save Project
or click the
Save Project
Button in the toolbar.
3-4 Saving Projects
New Projects
Newly created projects and screens are temporarily created in a temporary directory until saved.
The temporary directory and temporary files are as follows:
(NS-Designer install directory)\TEMP\untitled.ipp
When a project or screen is saved for the first time, the following dialog box will be displayed and the project will be saved (copied from the TEMP directory). Specify the folder and file name where the project will be saved, and click the Save Button.
Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.
•
•
The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.
Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).
If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when the
Save Button is clicked.
3-5
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-4 Saving Projects
Reference
♦ If a project is changed but has not yet been saved, a dialog box confirming whether or not to save the changes will be displayed when the project is closed.
♦
When saving new projects, if the specified saving location contains an existing project, the existing project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the new project data.
♦
The setting for whether or not the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP).
Therefore, even if the screen properties are set to pop-up screen, the screen will operate as a base screen when the PT is operating if the project has not been saved.
After changing the setting from base screen to pop-up screen, the relationship between whether the project or screen is saved and the operations at the PT is as follows:
Save project Save screen Operations at the PT
Yes Yes Operates as a pop-up screen.
Operates as a pop-up screen.
No Yes
Yes: Saves; No: Does not save saved screen.)
Operates as a base screen.
3-6
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name
1. Select
File - Save Project As
.
2. The Save Project As Dialog Box will be displayed.
Specify the directory and file name where the project will be saved, and click the
Save
Button.
Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.
•
The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.
•
Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).
If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when data is transferred to the PT.
Reference
♦
When the project name is changed and saved, all the original project data will also be copied to the new project directory.
♦
When specifying the project name, if the specified save destination has an existing project, the existing project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the currently open project data.
3-7
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-6 Opening Recent Projects
Up to the four most recently used projects can be opened directly from a menu.
1. Select
File - Recent Projects
.
2. The recently used project names are displayed with the directory path.
Select any project from the list.
The four most recent projects are displayed beginning with the most recent
N o t t e
♦
If a project edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, the following message, confirming data conversion, will be displayed.
Refer to
3-3 Opening Existing Projects
for details.
3-8
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7 Opening Template Projects
By specifying a template project, screens that are saved in specific projects can always be reused when creating new screens. This is a useful, for example, for reusing screens from a particular project many times, or for collecting frequently used screens in a specific project and using them as a group screen format when creating projects. The workflow when specifying a template project is given in the following flowchart.
1. Specify the template project
2. Create a new screen.
3. Display Select Template
Dialog Box
Reusing screen from template project
4. (a) Select the screen to be reused.
Not reusing screen from template project
4. (b) Use standard screen creation procedures.
5. Edit and save screen.
3-9
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7 Opening Template Projects
1. Select .
2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the project to be specified as a template project and click the
Open
Button.
Reference
♦
When changing template projects, specify the project again by selecting
File – Select Template
Project
.
1. The Select Template Dialog Box will be displayed each time a new screen is created. (Flowchart steps 2 and 3)
Select the screen to be reused. (Flowchart step 4 (a))
When not reusing the screen, click the
Cancel
Button to return to the standard procedure for creating a new screen. (Flowchart step 4 (b)) the Button.
3. The selected screen will be reused as the new screen.
3-10
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-7 Opening Template Projects
When a template project is cancelled, the Select Template Dialog Box is not displayed for creating a new screen, and the standard procedure is resumed.
(Procedure follows flowchart steps 2, 4(b), and 5.)
Click the
Cancel Template
Button in the Select Template Dialog Box.
3-11
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-8 Project Maintenance
Project maintenance includes functions to copy, delete, back up, and restore projects. The following maintenance functions can be performed.
Item
Duplicate
Delete
Backup
Restore
Details
Copies the specified project.
Deletes the specified project.
Backs up the specified project (specify floppy disk or folder).
Restores the backed up project data.
The operating methods common for each setting item are explained below.
1. Select .
2. A dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to close the screen being edited. Click the
Yes
Button.
3. The Project Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the desired tab.
4. Make the settings and then click the
Execute
Button.
3-12
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
the Tab.
2. Set the source project and destination project.
1
2
3-8 Project Maintenance
No. Item Details
2 Destination
Project
Project Set the source project file name to be copied as a full path name. When the
NS-Designer is used to open the project, the project file will be displayed automatically.
Set the destination project file name to be copied as a full path name. the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the
Yes
Button to copy the project.
Reference
♦
An existing project file can be specified as the project destination, but all the data in the previous existing project file will be deleted. (The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.)
If the same project is specified as the source project and destination project, the data will be deleted before it is copied, so the data will be lost. Do NOT set the same project for the copy source and destination.
3-13
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
the Tab.
2. Sets the project to be deleted.
3-8 Project Maintenance
1
No.
1
Item
Delete Project
Details
Set the name of the project file to be deleted as a full path name. the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the
Yes
Button to delete the project.
Reference
♦
Projects being edited cannot be deleted. Close the project first, and then retry the operation.
♦
Projects that have been deleted cannot be restored. Check the project carefully before deleting it.
the Tab.
2. Set the project to be backed up.
1
2
No.
Item
1 Backup
Project
2
Details
Sets the name of the project file to be backed up as a full path name. When the
NS-Designer is used to open the project, the project file is displayed automatically.
Backup To When a floppy disk is selected, the backup file will be saved on the floppy disk. Prepare the specified number of 1.44-Mbyte floppy disks. When a folder is selected, the backup file will be saved in the folder. A file is created at the backup destination under the name
[
project name
].XXX (XXX = 000, 001, …).
3-14
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-8 Project Maintenance
the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the
Yes
Button to back up the project.
4. When the backup destination is the floppy disk, the number of floppy disks required will be displayed. When more than one floppy disk is required, switch the floppy disks according to the messages displayed.
Reference
♦
If the same backup file of the project already exists in the backup destination, the previously existing backup file will be deleted and a new backup file will be created.
the Tab.
2. Set the project to be restored.
1
2
No. Item
1 Restore
Source
2 Restore
Destination
Details
When floppy disk is selected, the backup file stored in the floppy disk will be restored.
When folder is selected, the backup file stored on the hard disk will be restored.
Sets the name of the project file to be restored as a full path name.
Specify the name of the project file with the same name as that of the backup file. Example: If the backup file is
TEST.000
, then specify the project name as
TEST.IPP
(any path can be specified). the Button to display the confirmation dialog box. Click the
Yes
Button to restore the project.
4. When floppy disk is set as the restore source, switch the floppy disks according to the messages displayed.
3-15
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-8 Project Maintenance
Reference
♦
An existing project file can be specified as the restore destination, but the data in the existing project file will be deleted. The alarm/event data, however, will not be deleted. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
♦
An error will occur if no project with the same name as the backup file exists in the restore destination. If this error occurs, create a project file with the same name as the backup file, and then restore the project.
3-16
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-9 Project Properties
Properties can be set for projects. The following items can be set.
Item
Title
Switch Label
Macro
Select Language
Pop-up Menu
Macro Option
Numeral Input Option
Input Status Color
Data Format
Details
Set the project title (up to 64 characters).
Set the number of labels (1 to 16) and the label names (up to 15 characters).
Register the macros to be used for the project.
Select the system language to be used for the PT display.
Set pop-up menus using word buttons, command buttons, and String Display & Input.
Set whether “\n” that is included in the character string when using message box macros (MSGBOX) is to be handled as a line-feed code.
Set either to display present values or delete the current string and input a new string in the display column when performing numerical input for Numerical Display & Input objects.
Set the display color for text and background in the input field when inputting Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input objects.
Set the data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files.
The operating methods common for each project property setting item are explained below.
1. Select
Settings
-
Project properties
.
2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
The settings method for each setting item is explained next.
Select the
Title
Tab.
Set a title of up to 64 characters.
1. Select the
Switch Label
Tab.
2. Make the switch label settings.
3-17
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1
2
3
4
3-9 Project Properties
No.
1
Item
No. of Labels
3
4
Label Name
Initial Label
Details
Set how many labels can be switched (1 to 16).
Set the label number to be switched.
Set a label name of up to 15 characters.
Set the label number shown on the screen after the power to the PT is turned ON.
The default setting is 0.
1. Select the
Macro
Tab.
2. Register the macros to be used for the project. Refer to
6-1 Registering Macros
for details on how to set macros.
1. Select the
Select Language
Tab.
2. Select the system language to be used for the PT display. “System language” is the language used for PT display characters, such as in system menus, keypads, and dialog boxes.
3-18
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-9 Project Properties
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
If the character display format is set to ASCII code for string display and input, restore display, and data block tables (character string fields), the characters used for PT display are determined by the following character codes, according to the system language.
System language Character display Example (character code: B5)
Japanese
English
Shift JIS code
Latin 1 code
µ
If the character strings for label objects are indirectly specified, these characters will also be determined in the way shown in the table.
the Tab.
2. Make the settings for the pop-up menu used for setting Word Button, Command Button, and String
Display & Input objects.
1
2
3
4
No. Item
1 Text
2 Background Color
4
Show Delimiter
Details
Set the text color used in the pop-up menu.
Set the background color of the pop-up menu.
Set the font size used in the pop-up menu.
Select to display lines separating items in the pop-up menu.
Reference
♦
The settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page are not applied by the Test Tool in the
NS-Designer. To check the results of settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page, transfer the project to the PT and check operation on the PT.
3-19
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-9 Project Properties
the Tab.
2. Select to display messages over multiple lines by handling the “\n” in the character string as a line-feed code when using the message box macro (MSGBOX).
the Tab.
2. Set either to display or delete present values when inputting numerical values in Numerical Display
& Input objects.
the Tab.
2. Set the Text and background colors used in the input field when inputting numerical values or character strings for Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input objects.
3-20
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
3-10 Changing the PT Model
the Tab.
2. Set the data format to BCD or binary for specifying the line numbers in indirectly specified files.
This function changes the model of the NS-series PT that supports the project.
1. Select
Settings
–
Conversion Change PT Model
.
The PT Model Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the PT model to be changed, and then click the
OK
Button.
3. A message to confirm the model change will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to change the model.
3-21
Section 3 Manipulating Project Files
NS-Designer Operation Manual
When the PT model is changed, the screen size will change as follows:
Model before changing
NS12
Model after changing
NS10
3-10 Changing the PT Model
Screen size conversion
NS10
NS8
NS8
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
NS12
NS8
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
NS12
Converts the basic screen size to 640
×
480 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 640
×
480 dots are converted to 640
×
480 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 320
×
240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320
×
240 dots are converted to 320
×
240 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 800
×
600 dots.
No conversion.
Converts the basic screen size to 320
×
240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320
×
240 dots are converted to 320
×
240 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 800
×
600 dots.
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
NS5-SQ/TQ
NS5-MQ
NS12
NS10
NS8
NS12
NS10
NS8
Converts the basic screen size to 320
×
240 dots.
Pop-up screens that are larger than 320
×
240 dots are converted to 320
×
240 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 800
×
600 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 640
×
480 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 800
×
600 dots.
Converts the basic screen size to 640
×
480 dots.
Reference
♦
When the model has been changed from the NS12, NS10, or NS5 to the NS8 (or, conversely, from the NS8 to the NS12, NS10, or NS5), the size of the intervals in the touch-sensitive mesh are different, so it may not be possible to press some of the functional objects. After conversion, always check that the functional objects are above the touch-sensitive mesh size by running validation from the Tools Menu. Refer to
Section 9 Validation
for details on the validation function.
Although screen data for the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 is displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels on the ♦
NS-Designer displays and the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 screen, the data will be displayed in color if it is converted to data for a PT model with color displays on the NS-Designer or transferred to a PT with a color display screen. The color codes that are used when creating the screen data for the
♦
NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 will be displayed for screen data and the image colors will be used for BMP and
JPEG data.
All screen data created for PTs with color displays will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels if the screen data is converted for the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 on the NS-Designer or it is transferred to the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2.
3-22
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes the basic operations for the screens that can be displayed on the PT.
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
The operating methods common to each screen are explained here.
Set the properties for the screen currently being edited. The following items can be set using this function.
Item
Title
Size/Pop-up
Background/Others
Macro
Details
Set the title of the edited screen (up to 64 characters).
Set the types of edit screen (base screen or pop-up screen) and screen size.
Set the screen background and data file compression settings.
Register the macros to be set for the screen.
Detail setting Set the macro execution timing for the SAP (Smart Active Parts) library. For details, refer to
How to use Smart Active Parts
(PDF) included with the NS-Designer.
The operating methods common for each setting item are explained here.
1. Select
Settings
-
Screen Properties
.
2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
The settings method for each setting item is explained here.
1. Select the
Title
Tab.
2. Set a title of up to 64 characters.
4-1
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Select the
Size/Pop-up
Tab.
2. Set the screen size and pop-up screen setting.
1
2
3
4
4-1 Basic Operations
No.
2
Item Details
Set the PT screen display size.
The maximum screen size that can be set depends on the PT model selected.
NS12: Up to 796 dots horizontal
×
566 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 796 dots horizontal
×
596 dots vertical without title bar.
NS10, NS8: Up to 636 dots horizontal
×
446 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 636 dots horizontal
×
476 dots vertical without title bar.
NS5: Up to 316 dots horizontal
×
206 dots vertical with title bar.
Up to 316 dots horizontal
×
236 dots vertical without title bar.
Select this item to set the size as the default the next time a new screen is created.
Use as Default
Screen Size
Use as Pop-up
Screen
Select this item to use the screen as a pop-up screen when the PT is running.
When not selected, the screen is used as a base screen.
Screen number 0 cannot be set as a pop-up screen.
Settings of other screens can be changed freely.
Screen
Display Position Select the position from one of the following settings.
Center of Screen, Top Left of Screen, Bottom Left of Screen, Top Right of
Screen, Bottom Right of Screen, or Any Position. When Any Position is selected, specify the X and Y coordinates for the top left of the pop-up screen.
Setting
Screen
Each of the setting items is as follows: Select each item to enable the setting.
Enable input on other screens
Closes when base screen switches
No title bar
Reference
♦
If
No title bar
is selected under
Pop-up Screen Setting
, the screen’s frame will not be displayed when the screen is displayed on the PT.
Title bar and frame displayed
No title bar or frame displayed
♦
If
Any Position
is selected under
Pop-up Screen Display Position
and the values input for the screen coordinates are out of range, the pop-up screen will be displayed as a full screen.
4-2
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Select the
Background/Others
Tab.
2. Set the screen background and data file compression settings.
1
2
3
4
4-1 Basic Operations
No.
4
Edit
Item
Use as Default
Background Color
Select File Name
Select
Details
Select the screen’s background color from 256 options.
Click the
Set Color
Button to display the Color Setting Dialog Box. Select the background color from the dialog box.
Select this item to set the background color as the default next time a new screen is created.
Specify the background file.
Select to specify an image file as the screen background. The following files can be specified.
Specify a file name as a character string of up to 12 characters (up to 8 characters for the file name and 3 characters for the extension). The following characters can be used for file names:
Alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar sign ($), and period (.)
BMP and JPEG file formats are supported.
Click the
Select
Button to open the File Dialog Box. Select the file from the dialog box.
Click the
Edit
Button to start the image editor and allow the background to be edited. Specify the image editor to be started up in the Editor Tab Page of the
Options Dialog Box (
Tools - Options
).
Select this item to save the screen data file in compressed format.
Data File
The order of display
Display all objects at once.
(Recommended)
Display frames and fixed objects first.
Select this item to display all objects at once after getting information that is necessary to display the objects.
Select this item to display frames and fixed objects first and then display all of the other objects after getting the necessary information.
Reference
♦
♦
Bitmap files (BMP or JPEG) that conform to Microsoft Windows standards can be set for the background.
Specify which application to start up as the image editor under
Tools - Options
.
4-3
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
1. Select the
Macro
Tab.
2. Register the macros to be used for the screen. Refer to
6-1 Registering Macros
for details on how to register macros.
The formation of squares set at equal intervals on the screen is called the grid.
This function sets whether to show or hide the grid and the size of the grid interval.
1. Select to display the Set Grid Dialog Box.
1
2
3
No.
2
4
Item
Snap to Grid
Check when grid is not clear
4
Details
Select this item to display the grid lines. The grid serves as a guide for arranging the functional objects.
Select this item to enable the grid. Enabling the grid allows functional objects to be snapped to the grid when moving them.
Specify the width and height of the grid intervals in dot units.
Select this item to reverse the color of the grid line. Use this setting if the grid lines are not clear because they are a similar color to the background.
4-4
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
The methods for switching the display type on the screen and confirming object settings are described here.
This function can be used to display the form of a functional object on the current screen when the status of the address is ON. (The default is OFF.)
OFF Status ON Status
Select
View - Simulate ON/OFF
or click the
Simulate ON/OFF
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Simulate ON/OFF
Menu item indicates that simulate ON status is currently displayed.
♦
To return to simulate OFF status, select
View - Simulate ON/OFF
or click the
Simulate ON/OFF
Button in the toolbar again.
4-5
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
This function displays the ID numbers assigned to objects, except those assigned to tables.
ID numbers are assigned to objects automatically in the order that the objects are created.
Show ID
Select
View - Show ID
or click the
Show ID
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Show ID
Menu item indicates that the ID numbers are currently displayed.
♦
To return to the normal display, select
View - Show ID
or click the
Show ID
Button in the toolbar again.
♦
The ID numbers can be displayed in a small font. The procedure is as follows:
1. Select
Tools - Options
.
2. Select the
Edit/Disp.
Tab.
3. Select
Use small font for ID display
.
♦
When an object is deleted causing a break in the sequence of ID numbers, the missed ID number will be allocated to the object that is created next.
♦
When a table is created, ID numbers are assigned to the table itself as well as to the functional objects contained in it. When the ID numbers are displayed, however, the ID numbers of the functional objects in the table will be displayed without showing the table ID number.
4-6
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
A functional object ID consists of the object type and four-digit numerals.
Type
Buttons
Lamps
Data Log
Data Block
Others
Displays &
Inputs
Alarm
Displays
System Clock
Functional object
ON/OFF Buttons
Word Buttons
Command Buttons
Bit Lamps
Word Lamps
Numeral Displays & Inputs
String Displays & Inputs
Thumbwheel Switches
Temporary Inputs
Text
List Selection
Level Meter
Bitmap
Analogue Meter
Broken-line Graph
Video Display
Alarm Display
Alarm/Event Summary History
Date
Time
Data Log Graph
Data Block Table
Frame
Table
ID
PB0000 to PB1023
PBW0000 to PBW1023
PBC0000 to PBC1023
PL0000 to PL1023
PLW0000 to PLW1023
NUM0000 to NUM1023
STR0000 to STR1023
THW0000 to THW1023
TMP0000 to TMP1023
LBL0000 to LBL1023
LST0000 to LST1023
LEV0000 to LEV1023
BMP0000 to BMP1023
ANA0000 to ANA1023
BLG0000 to BLG1023
VDO0000 to VDO1023
ALM0000 to ALM1023
ALS0000 to ALS1023
DAT0000 to DAT1023
TIM0000 to TIM1023
DLOG0000 to DLOG1023
DTBL0000 to DTBL1023
FRM0000 to FRM1023
TBL0000 to TBL1023
Fixed object IDs are displayed as 4-digit numerals.
0000 to 1023
This function displays the address set for each functional object.
Normal Display Address Display
Select
View - Show Address
or click the
Show Address
Button in the toolbar.
4-7
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Toolbar
4-1 Basic Operations
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Show Address
Menu item indicates that the addresses are currently being displayed.
♦
To return to the normal display, select
View - Show Address
or click the
Show Address
Button in the toolbar again.
♦
The addresses displayed with this function contain the data set in the General Tab Page of the Object Properties Dialog Box for the functional objects.
♦
Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.
4-8
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
The following information is displayed in each functional object when Show Address is selected.
Type
Button
Button
Functional object
ON/OFF Button
Word Button
Display information
The write address, display address 1, and display address 2 are displayed in the following format.
$B100(W)
$B101(R1)
$B102(R2)
(W: Write address; R1: Display address 1; R2: Display address 2)
The write address is displayed in the following format.
Command Button
Switch
Screen
$W100
The set values are displayed in the following format.
•
Specified screen
50(P)
$W100(W)
(P: Page number; W: Page write address)
•
Indirectly specified screen
$W10(P)
$W100(W)
Command Button
Switch
Screen
(P: Indirect reference address; W: Page write address)
•
Selection by Pop-up Menu
POPUP
(POPUP is the fixed display.)
•
Forward
PAGE+
$W100(W)
(PAGE+ is the fixed display; W: Page write address)
•
Backward
PAGE
−
$W100(W)
Key Button
(PAGE
−
is the fixed display; W: Page write address)
KEYBUTTON
Control
Pop-up
Screen
Display
System
Menu
(KEYBUTTON is the fixed display.)
PCTRL
(PCTRL is the fixed display.)
SYSMENU
(SYSMENU is the fixed display.)
4-9
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
Type
Button
Functional object
Command Button
Stop
Buzzer
None
Video
Capture
Display information
BUZZER
(BUZZER is the fixed display.)
NOP
(NOP is the fixed display.)
Contrast
Adjustment
Capture
(Capture is the fixed display.)
Contrast + 10
(The following function names and set values are displayed.)
- Contrast
- Brightness
- Depth
- Tone
Vision
Sensor
Console
Output
Data Block
Control
-FILE--PL
C
ESC
(The signal name is displayed.)
File -> PLC
Data Block
Control
-FILE--
NS,
NS--PLC
(The following control information is displayed.)
- File -> PLC
- PLC -> File
- Record Delete
File -> NS
(The following control information is displayed.)
- File -> NS
- NS -> File
- NS -> PLC
- PLC -> NS
4-10
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Type
Button
Lamp
Display
& Input
Functional object
Command Button
Data Block
Control
–Read
Record
Label
Bit Lamp
Word Lamp
Record Label
Display information
(Record Label is the fixed display)
The address is displayed in the following format.
$B100
The address is displayed in the following format.
Numeral Display &
Input
String Display &
Input
$W100
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
4-1 Basic Operations
4-11
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
Type
Display
& Input
Functional object
Thumbwheel
Switch
Display information
The address is displayed in the following format.
$W100
Temporary Input The product name is displayed in the following format.
TEMPORARY
Display List Selection
Level Meter
Bitmap
Analogue Meter
$W100
•
File
LIST.lst
The border information is displayed in the following format.
(M:
(X:
(O:
(1:
(N:
(XA:
(0A:
(1A:
(NA:
$W120(M)
1000(X)
$W100(0A)
$W101(1A)
0(N)
Monitor address)
Max. fixed value)
Border 1-2 fixed value)
Border 2-3 fixed value)
Min. fixed value)
Max. indirect address)
Border 1-2 indirect address)
Border 2-3 indirect address)
Min. indirect address)
The file is displayed in the following format.
The set value is displayed in the following format.
•
Internal Memory ($W)
ERR.bmp
4-12
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
Objects for which errors were detected in validation are displayed with red borders. Refer to
Section 9
Validation
for details on the validation function.
Example:
Validation items
Overlapping of functional objects
Functional objects created inside screen/frame area
Select
View - Show Error Object
or click the
Show Error Object
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Show Error Object
Menu item indicates that the error objects are currently displayed.
♦
To return to the normal display, select
View - Show Error Object
or click the
Show Error Object
Button in the toolbar again.
This function is used to display the applicable sheet object.
The sheet object is displayed by default.
Sheet Objects Not Displayed Sheet Objects Displayed
Select
View - Show Sheet Object
or click the
Show Sheet Object
Button in the toolbar.
4-13
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Toolbar
4-1 Basic Operations
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Show Sheet Object
Menu item indicates that the sheet objects are currently displayed.
♦
To hide the sheet object, select
View - Show Sheet Object
or click the
Show Sheet Object
Button in the toolbar again.
♦
Refer to
4-3 Sheets
for details on basic sheet operations.
The methods for changing the display on the screen are explained here.
The methods for switching the display of screen windows are as follows:
Cascade (
Window - Cascade
)
Cascades the open windows on the screen with the active window on top.
Tile (
Window - Tile
)
Tiles the open windows.
Arrange Icons (
Window - Arrange Icons
)
Arranges minimized windows.
The minimized windows are arranged from left to right at the bottom of the application window. (This command cannot be used if there are no minimized windows.)
Previous Screen
Displays the screen of the previous screen page number.
Select
View - Previous Screen
or click the
Previous Screen
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Next Screen
Displays the screen of the next screen page number.
Select
View - Next Screen
or click the
Next Screen
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
4-14
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This function is used to switch labels when multiple labels are registered.
4-1 Basic Operations
Switch labels by selecting
Previous Label
or
Next Label
from the toolbar.
Toolbar
1. Select
View - Switch Label
.
The Switch Label Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the label to be displayed and then click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
Refer to
3-9 Project Properties
for details on setting multiple labels.
4-15
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-1 Basic Operations
This function is used to display the points where the PT touch points are positioned in the screen. Use this function to check that the functional objects are arranged above touch points.
Select
View - Show Touch Points
.
Note
Touch input will not be recognized if the functional objects are not created above the touch points. Therefore, always arrange the functional objects above the touch points.
Refer to
Arranging Functional Objects
under
5-1 Creating Functional Objects
for details.
Reference
♦
The symbol before the
Show Touch Points
Menu item indicates that the touch points are currently displayed.
♦
To return to the normal display, select
View - Show Touch Points
again.
Zooms the screen display up and down.
Use the Zoom Dialog Box to specify the magnification between 25% and 800%. Select
Fit
to zoom the display up or down to fit the current window size.
1. Select .
The Zoom Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the magnification and then click the
OK
Button.
4-16
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Using
Fit
4-1 Basic Operations
The same horizontal and vertical magnification are used full screen.
Refresh the screen to delete garbage on the screen and correct distortion in the display.
Select
View - Refresh
.
4-17
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
The basic screen operations are explained here.
Select
File - New Screen
or click the
New Screen
Button in the toolbar.
The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
Reference
♦
When a new project is created, the New Screen Dialog Box is displayed after the PT model has been selected.
Select
New Screen
and then click the
OK
Button.
The new screen will be displayed.
Reference
♦
The new screen will be automatically created in the screen with the lowest page number from the screens not being used.
1. Select and then click the
OK
Button. Proceed as described below for new screens or for reusing screens.
4-18
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
2. The Reuse Existing Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the projects with the screen to be reused.
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
3. The Select Page Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the screen to be reused and then click the
OK
Button.
4. When the screen with the applicable sheet settings is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed. To cancel the sheet settings, click the
No
Button and proceed to step 5.
The sheet will be copied with the same sheet number as that of the original sheet. If a sheet with the same sheet number as the copied sheet already exists, a message will be displayed confirming whether to overwrite the sheet. Click the
Yes
Button to overwrite the existing sheet with the sheet being reused. Click the
No
Button to use the existing sheet.
The selected screen will be used to create a new screen.
Reference
♦
When using a screen created for a PT with color displays in creating a project for the
NS5-MQ0 @ -V2, the screen will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels in the preview.
When using a screen created for the NS5-MQ0
@
-V2 in creating a project for a PT with color displays, the screen will be displayed in color in the preview.
4-19
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
1. Select
File - Open Screen
or click the
Open Screen
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
2. The Open Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the screen to be opened and then click the
OK
Button.
1
2
4
3
5
4-20
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
No. Details
1
2
3
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the pop-up screen.
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in pages where the error check detected an error.
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the screen page being used.
4
5
Previews the selected screen. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the
Preview
check box.
Display a specified screen by specifying the screen page number and clicking the
Jump
Button.
3. The selected screen will be displayed.
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for opening screens are the
Ctrl + O
Keys.
When an unused screen page number is opened, a new screen will be created.
Select
File - Save Screen
or click the
Save Screen
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for saving screens are the
Ctrl + S
Keys.
If a screen has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the changes will be displayed when the screen is closed.
Click the
Yes
Button to save the changes.
♦
The setting for whether the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP). Therefore, even if pop-up screen is set in the screen properties, the screen will operate as a base screen when running the PT if the project has not been saved.
After changing the setting from a base screen to a pop-up screen, the relationship between whether the project or screen is saved and operations at the PT is as follows:
Save project
Yes
Save screen
Yes
Operations at the PT
Operates as a pop-up screen.
Operates as a pop-up screen.
No Yes
Yes: Saves; No: Does not save last saved.)
Operates as a base screen.
4-21
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
1. Select
File - Close Screen
or click the
Close
Button
Screen Zoomed Out
at the top right of the screen.
Screen Zoomed In
Click
Click
This function saves the whole project as well as the open screen.
1. Select
File - Save All
.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed when saving has been completed.
Click the
OK
Button.
Screen data maintenance, such as copying and deleting screens, switching screen page numbers, and changing screen titles can be performed for the following items.
Item Details
Change Title
Duplicate
Delete
Switch Screen Page Number
Changes the screen title.
Copies the specified screen.
Deletes the specified screen.
Switches the screen’s page number.
4-22
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The screen maintenance procedure is as follows:
1. Select
Tools - Screen Maintenance
.
The Screen Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed.
4-2 Creating and Saving Screens
2. Select the screen on which maintenance will be performed.
3. Perform maintenance as follows:
Switching Screen Page Numbers
Click the
Move Up
and
Move Down
Buttons to switch to higher or lower page numbers.
Copying
Click the
Duplicate
Button to display the following dialog box, and then set the destination screen page number and the new screen title.
Deleting
Click the
Delete
Button.
Changing Titles
Enter the new title in the title column. the Button.
Reference
♦
If the screen page number to be copied is already being used, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Cancel
Button and specify a different screen page number to stop the screen being overwritten.
♦
Screens that have been deleted cannot be restored. Therefore, check the screen page number carefully before deleting it.
4-23
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-3 Sheets
The basic sheet operations are explained here.
Sheets are screens that can be displayed in layers on multiple user screens. If, for example, objects common to each screen such as the date, time, and screen switching objects are created as a sheet, they can be used in more than one screen by performing some simple settings.
Base Screen/Pop-up Screen Sheet Screen
Applied
Reference
♦
Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on sheets.
1. Open the project that will be used to create the sheet.
2. Select
File - Open Sheet
.
3. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the sheet page number to be created and then click the
OK
Button.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the
Yes
Button.
The new sheet will be displayed.
4-24
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-3 Sheets
Reference
♦
Sheets cannot be used to specify pop-up screens or background files, or to add macro functions.
The background color in the sheet is not applied to the destination application screen.
1. Select
File - Open Sheet
.
2. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the sheet and then click the
OK
Button.
1
2
3
No. Details
1 An asterisk (*) will be displayed for sheets where the error check detected an error.
2
3
Displays a preview of the selected sheet. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the
Preview
check box.
Display a specified sheet by specifying the sheet page number and clicking the
Jump
Button.
Select
File - Close Screen
or click the
Close
Button at the top right of the screen window.
Screen Zoomed Out Screen Zoomed In
Click
Click
4-25
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select
File - Save Screen
or click the
Save Screen
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for saving are the
Ctrl + S
Keys.
If a sheet has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the changes will be displayed when the sheet is closed.
Click the
Yes
Button to save the changes.
4-3 Sheets
The methods for applying sheets to screens are described here.
1. Open the project where the sheet will be applied.
2. Select
File - Apply Sheet
.
The Apply Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Apply the sheet to the screen. a. Select the screen. b. Select the sheet page number to be applied. c. Click the
Apply
Button.
A preview will be displayed of the screen to which the sheet was applied.
4-26
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-3 Sheets
1
2
3
4
5. Apply the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
If the sheet has not been saved, it will not be reflected in the preview display even when the
Apply
Button is pressed.
This function is used to display the list of sheets, copy and delete sheets, switch sheet page numbers, and change sheet titles.
The sheet maintenance procedure is as follows:
1. Select
Tools - Sheet Maintenance
.
2. The procedure is the same as for Screen Maintenance. Refer to
Screen Maintenance
under
4-2
Creating and Saving Screens
for details.
4-27
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-4 Frames
Frames are used to switch a part of the display contents in screens.
•
•
•
Frames consist of more than one page. The display contents can be switched by switching the pages according to their address value.
The following objects can be arranged in the frames.
Fixed objects
Functional objects (Except Video Displays and Data Block Tables)
Tables
1. Select
Functional Objects - Frame
or click the
Frame
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
2. The cursor display will change to the following shape.
3. Move the cursor to the position of the frame’s first point.
4. Drag the cursor (by clicking the left mouse button and keeping it pressed while moving the mouse) until it is positioned at the end point of the frame display area.
Drag
5. Select the frame, and then select
Settings - Object Properties
or click the right mouse button to display the pop-up menu and select
Frame Properties
.
The Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
General Tab Page
1
2
3
4-28
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-4 Frames
No. Item
No. of Frames
Details
Set the number of frame pages and the number of the frame page to be edited.
Set the number of frames for which the display contents are changed.
Specify the frame page number of the screen being created. Page No. Edited
Set Background Color
2 Address
3
Select this item to enable setting the color of the frame’s background.
Frame with a Tab
Attach a Tab to a Frame
Tab Color
Tab Position
Set the address that specifies the frame page number to be displayed.
Examples: Displays frame page number 0 when $W0 is 0.
Displays frame page number 1 when $W0 is 1.
Displays frame page number 2 when $W0 is 2.
Set tabs in the frame. When the PT is running, click the tabs to switch frame pages.
Select this item to create frames with tabs for each page.
Specify the tab color.
Select the position of the tabs from top, bottom, left, and right.
Top Bottom
Tab Height
Left Right
Specify the tab height in 18-dot units.
Examples:
18 dots when the tab height is set to 1
36 dots when the tab height is set to 2
Control Flag Tab Page
This tab page is used to control whether all objects in the frame page have input enabled or prohibited, and are displayed or not displayed.
Item
Enable Input
Display/No Display
Details
Select to enable or disable input for all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using addresses.
Select whether to display all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using addresses.
Reference
♦
If the frame is set to No Display, input will not be accepted, regardless of whether the functional objects in the frame are set to
Enable Input
.
♦
When indirect specification is selected, the indirect input display can be controlled according to the specified address values, as follows:
•
Enable/Disable Input
Enable Input when address is ON
(Input is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)
Enable Input when address is OFF
(Input is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)
•
Display/No Display
Display when address is ON
(Display is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)
Display when address is OFF
(Display is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)
♦
♦
Always create screens so that objects are contained within the frames.
To set the communications address data format (BCD/binary) select and then set the format in the Data Format Tab.
Settings - Project Properties
4-29
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Size/Position Tab Page
This tab page is used to set the frame size and position details.
Size
Item
Height
Width
Top Left of
Screen
X
Y
4-4 Frames
Details
Set the size of the frame in dot units.
Set the height of the frame.
Set the width of the frame.
Specify the distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame in dot units, and set the position of the frame.
Set the horizontal distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.
Set the vertical distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.
6. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
The method for creating screens for each frame page is as follows:
1. Double-click the frame area.
2. The functional objects and fixed objects outside the frame area will be hidden, and edit mode will be enabled within the frame.
3. Screens are created using the same procedure as for normal screens.
4. Return to normal screen creation mode by clicking outside the frame area in the screen.
Normal screen creation mode Screen creation mode in a frame
Double-click
Return to normal screen creation mode
Edit frame page
Click
Reference
♦
Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on frames.
The frame tab title is created using text objects. By creating text within frames, the tab titles that are not active will be hidden when the PT is running. Therefore, create tab titles when operating in normal screen editing mode.
Click the
Text
Button in the toolbar and paste the text. Position the text so that it overlaps the tab position.
4-30
Section 4 Screen Types and Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
4-4 Frames
Reference
♦
If a message that overlapping objects is prohibited is displayed, select
Tools - Options
, and then select the
Edit/Disp.
Tab and deselect
Prohibit functional objects from overlapping
.
The methods used to switch frame pages when working in NS-Designer are explained here.
This function is used to switch to the previous or next frame page.
Select
View - Previous/Next Frame Page
or click the
Previous/Next Frame Page
Button in the toolbar.
Toolbar
This function is used to display a user-specified frame page.
1. Display the Frame Setting Dialog Box.
2. Specify the page number to be edited.
3. Click the
OK
Button.
4-31
Section 5 Object Operations
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes common object operations.
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
This section describes the process from placing a functional object on a screen through to starting to set the properties.
1. To create a new functional object, select either items under the Functional Object Menu or an icon on the functional object toolbar.
Toolbar
The cursor will change to the following shape.
2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the functional object.
Drag
Reference
♦
Hold down the
Shift
Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦
Hold down the
Ctrl
Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.
♦
Deselect (turn OFF)
Prohibit functional objects from overlapping
on the
Edit/Disp
Tab Page in the Options Dialog Box (
Tools - Options
) to overlap functional objects with other objects.
5-1
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
Note
♦
Functional objects must be placed on touch points otherwise they will not be processed as events when they are pressed during PT operation. (See example 1.)
♦
In addition, inputs are processed as events for the functional object located on the touch point for the touch switch that received the input. This means that if a point is pressed where no functional object exists but there is a functional object on the touch point in the same touch switch, the same processing will be performed as if the functional object itself was pressed. (See example 2.)
♦
The position of touch points can be checked under
View - Show Touch Points
. Refer to
Show Touch
Points
under
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
•
Touch switch (area surrounded by square)
Touch point
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
·
•
·
•
·
•
·
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Not processed as an event even when button pressed.
Processed as a button event even if the gray area is pressed.
White section (center of button) is processed as an event. The gray area is not processed as an event.
Functional object properties are set in the Property Settings Dialog Box for each functional object.
1. Perform one of the following operations.
•
Move the cursor to the functional object for which properties are to be set and double-click the object.
Double-click.
•
Select the functional object and select
Settings - Object properties
.
•
Select the functional object and click the right mouse button. Select the object properties menu from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each functional object.)
•
Select the functional object and press the
Enter
Key.
5-2
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
2. The dialog box for setting the functional object properties will be displayed.
Make the settings on each tab page.
3. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
Click the Button to check the property settings on the screen while continuing to make the settings in the dialog box.
♦
Perform the following procedure to display the Property Settings Dialog Box for the functional object as soon as the functional object has been created.
1. Select
Tools
-
Options
. the Tab and select (turn ON)
Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object
.
Multiple functional objects of the same kind can be created at the same time by using tables.
The following functional objects can be created using tables.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ON/OFF Buttons
Word Buttons
Bit lamps
Word lamps
Text objects
Command Buttons
Numeral display and input objects
String display and input objects
5-3
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
Item names
Rows (horizontal)
Columns (vertical)
1. Either select
Functional objects - Table
or click the
Table
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The cursor will change to the following shape:
2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the table display region.
Drag
Settings, such as the number of lines and columns in a table and the functional objects to be created, are made in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the table.
To display the Property Settings Dialog Box, select the table and select
Settings – Object Properties
, or right-click and select the
Table
properties from the pop-up menu.
The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
5-4
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
No. Item
1 Table
Combo Box
Details
Sets the type of functional object to be created in the table and the properties.
Select the type of functional object to be created in the table.
Functional Object Default
Button
Allocate address automatically
Click the
Functional Object Default
Button to display the Property Settings Dialog
Box for the functional object selected from the combo box and set the properties for all functional objects created in the table.
If the address is to be automatically allocated, the start address must be specified beforehand.
Select
Allocate address automatically
to specify the direction and interval for functional objects in the table and automatically allocate the address. The direction can be selected as either horizontal or vertical.
Example: Start address for address allocation: $B100
Direction: Horizontal; Interval: 2
2
3
Item name and
No. of items
Position of item name
No. of items
Item Name
Default Button
Focus move direction by Enter Key
Sets the item name position and number of items for tables.
Item names can be set automatically using text objects.
The item name position can be selected from top line, left column, or top line and left column. Select
None
if item names are not required.
Set the number of functional objects to be set in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Click the
Item Name Default
Button to display the Property Setting Dialog Box for text objects and set the properties for all item names.
Right or left can be selected as the direction for input focus to move when the Enter Key is pressed after functional object input has been completed. This option is enabled for numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects.
Select
None
if focus travel is not required.
3. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
Batch property settings can be made for lines or columns of functional objects in tables.
1. Select one functional object in the line or column for which the properties are to be edited.
Making batch settings for the first line.
2. Click the right mouse button and select
Batch setting of table - Unit setting of column
or
Batch setting of table - Unit setting of row
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
5-5
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
3. The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the
Functional Object Default
Button to display the Batch Setting Dialog Box.
4. The rest of the procedure is the same as for normal settings.
The width and height of functional objects in tables can be freely changed in line or column units.
Changing Individual Line Heights or Column Widths
This section describes how to change the line height or column width without changing the size of the table.
The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the horizontal or vertical edges of the functional object.
Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the line or column has reached the desired size.
5-6
Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects
Changing Table Size
This section describes how to change the size of tables without changing the ratio of the line height to the column width.
1. The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the table.
2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the table has reached the desired size.
Reference
♦
The table width or height can be changed independently.
With the cursor changed to the shape, drag the cursor in the horizontal or vertical direction.
5-7
Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
This section describes the process from placing a fixed object on a screen through to starting to set the properties.
Either select items under the Fixed Object Menu or select an icon on the fixed object toolbar to create a new fixed object.
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.
2. The cursor will change to the following shape:
3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.
Drag
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the polygon or polyline and click the left mouse button.
2. Move the cursor to the next point and click the left mouse button. Repeat this operation until all the points for the polygon or polyline are drawn.
Left click
Left click
Left click
3. Click the right mouse button at the last point to close the drawing mode for polygon and polyline.
Right click
5-8
Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the sector or arc and click the left mouse button.
2. Drag the cursor to draw a circle or oval.
A square mark ( g
) will appear at the 3-o’clock point on the circumference of the circle or ellipse.
3. Place the cursor on the square box. When the cursor has changed to a plus sign (+), drag the cursor to any position.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the drawing mode for sectors and arcs.
Reference
♦
Hold down the
Shift
Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦
Hold down the
Ctrl
Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.
♦
Deselect (turn OFF)
Prohibit functional objects from overlapping
on the
Edit/Disp
Tab Page in the
Options Dialog Box (
Tools - Options
) to overlap fixed objects with other objects.
5-9
Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
Fixed object properties are set in the Property Setting Dialog Box for each fixed object.
1. Select the fixed objects for which the properties are to be set.
2. Perform one of the following operations.
Move the cursor to the fixed object for which properties are to be set and double-click the object.
Double-click
After selecting the fixed object, select
Settings - Object properties
.
After selecting the fixed object, click the right mouse button and select the object properties menu from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each fixed object.)
After selecting the fixed object, press the
Enter
Key.
3. The dialog box for setting the fixed object properties will be displayed.
Make the settings on each tab page.
4. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
5-10
Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects
Reference
♦
Use the following procedure to display the Property Setting Dialog Box as soon as a new fixed object has been created.
1. Select
Tools - Options
.
2. Select the
Edit/Disp.
Tab and select (turn ON)
Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object
.
5-11
Section 5 Object Operations
Edit and layout functions can be displayed on a pop-up menu.
To display this pop-up edit menu, select the object and click the right mouse button.
The items on the pop-up edit menu are the same for all objects.
5-3 Pop-up Menus
5-12
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
This section describes how to edit the types of object that are positioned on a screen.
Discards changes and restores the previous status. The undo operation can restore up to 10 previous operations. There are two methods for undoing operations.
Select
Edit - Undo
or press the
Undo
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for undoing operations are the
Ctrl + Z
Keys.
Redoes operations that were undone using the
Undo
function.
Up to 10 previous operations can be redone. (The number of redo operations is restricted to the number of operations that have been undone.)
Select
Edit - Redo
or press the
Redo
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
Perform the above operation again to go back one more status.
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for redoing operations are the
Ctrl + Y
Keys.
5-13
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Cuts the selected object.
Objects that have been cut can be pasted to other positions or screens using the
Paste
or
Offset Paste
functions.
Offset Paste
can be used for functional objects only.
1. Select the object.
If multiple objects are to be cut at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select
Edit - Cut
or press the
Cut
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
3. A dialog box to confirm the cut operation will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to cut the object or objects.
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for cutting objects are the
Ctrl + X
Keys.
Methods for Selecting Multiple Objects
1. Hold the
Shift
Key and click the object.
Click while holding down the
Shift
Key.
2. Surround the objects using the cursor.
♦
Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box does not have to be displayed before executing the cut operation.
1. Select
Tools
-
Options
.
2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the
Edit/Disp.
Tab and deselect (turn OFF)
Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects
.
5-14
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Copies the selected objects.
Objects that have been copied can be pasted to other positions or screens using the
Paste
or
Offset
Paste
functions.
Offset Paste
can only be used for functional objects.
1. Select the object.
If multiple objects are to be copied at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Either select
Edit - Copy
or click the
Copy
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for copying are the
Ctrl + C
Keys.
5-15
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Pastes objects that have been copied or cut to other positions or screens.
Pastes the object with the same settings as the original.
1. Display the paste destination screen.
2. Select
Edit - Paste
or press the
Paste
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for standard pasting are the
Ctrl + V
Keys.
Offset paste is supported only for functional objects. The functional object is pasted and allocated an address determined by a specified offset.
1. Display the paste destination screen.
2. Select
Edit - Offset Paste
.
3. The Offset Paste Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the offset value.
4. Click the
OK
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The shortcut keys for offset pasting are the
Ctrl + W
Keys.
5-16
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Deletes the selected objects.
1. Select the object to be deleted.
If multiple objects are to be deleted at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select
Edit - Delete
.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to delete the object or objects.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
♦
♦
The shortcut key for deleting objects is the
Delete
Key.
Select
Edit - Select all
to delete all functional and fixed objects on the screen.
Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box is not required to be displayed before the delete operation is executed.
1. Select
Tools - Options
.
2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the
Edit/Disp.
Tab and deselect (turn OFF)
Display confirmation dialog
when deleting objects.
♦
In contrast to the cut operation, deleted functional or fixed objects cannot be pasted elsewhere.
Finds functional object addresses, comments, or labels.
1. Either select
Edit - Find
or click the
Find
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The Find Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
5-17
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
No.
Setting
1 Find
2 Find
3 Range
Current Screen
Whole Project
Screens
Details
Specifies the address, comment, or label to be found.
Selects address, comment, or label as the data to be found.
For addresses, click the
Set
Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
Use this dialog box and enter the address to be found in the
Find What
column.
For comments and labels, enter the comment or label name to be found in the
Find What
column. Select (turn ON)
Match Case
to distinguish between upper or lower case in the search.
Select the search range from the following options.
Searches the screen displayed on top.
Searches the whole project.
Searches a specified range of screens. If
As Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), the search will target sheets.
2. Click the
Find
Button to start the search.
When the search has been completed, the Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Select the desired functional object from the list of search results and click the
Jump
Button or double-click on the line to be selected.
The screen where the selected functional object is found is displayed and the functional object flashes because it is selected.
Select the object and click the
Jump
Button or double-click the object line.
The black square cursors will flash.
5-18
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The shortcut keys for finding objects are the
Ctrl + F
Keys.
If
Current Screen
or
Screens
is selected for the search range, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be displayed. Also, if
Whole Project
is selected for the search range,
Jump
cannot be performed from the search results to the addresses set using the following menu items.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
5-19
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Replaces an address set for a functional object with another address or replaces a host set in a project with another host.
1. Select
Edit - Replace
.
The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
No. Setting
1 Address
Range
Details
Specifies the address range to be replaced.
Replaces corresponding addresses in the range
Start Address
to
End Address
, starting with
Replace With (Start Address)
.
For the settings shown in the following dialog box, $B0 to $B100 will be replaced with
$B1000 to $B1100.
2 Range
To replace bits, specify the bit address, e.g., HOST:00000.00.
Select the replacement range from
Current Screen
,
Whole Project
, or
Screens
. If
As
Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), the search will target sheets.
2. Click the
Replace
Button. A message confirming the replacement will be displayed.
3. Click the
Yes
Button.
A dialog box to notify that the replace operation has been completed will be displayed.
5-20
Section 5 Object Operations
4. Click the
OK
Button.
1. Select
Edit - Replace
.
The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select a host to be replaced.
5-4 Editing
No. Setting
1 Replace Select to replace one of the following:
Details
Address
Host and Replace host
Specify the name of the host to replace. In the following dialog box, "Serial A" is being replaced with "Serial B."
5-21
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
No. Setting
3 Range
Details
Set the unit number range when the search host is a Temperature Controller. The unit number ranges that can be set are as follows:
E5AN/E5AR: 0 to 31
E5ZN: 0 to 15
3. Click the
Replace
Button. A replacement confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the
Yes Button.
4. A dialog box will be displayed when the replacement has been completed. Click the
OK
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for replacing addresses are the
Ctrl + H
Keys.
If
Current Screen
or
Screens
is selected for the range for address replacement, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be replaced.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm - Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
♦
The addresses set in Internal Memory (Bit Memory and Word Memory) cannot be replaced.
Useful for selecting all objects or the same type of objects on a screen.
Selects all objects on the screen.
Select
Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects - Fixed Objects
.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The shortcut keys for selecting all functional and fixed objects are the
Ctrl + A
Keys.
5-22
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Selects only the same type of functional or fixed object as one that has already been selected.
Select
Edit - Select All - Same Functional Object Type
.
Functional objects of the same type
Fixed objects of the same type
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The shortcut keys for selecting all functional or fixed objects of the same type are the
Ctrl + D
Keys.
5-23
Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing
Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically. Functional objects
(including those inside tables or frames) can be repeated with an offset value set for the address.
1. Select the object to be repeated.
If multiple objects are to be repeated at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.
2. Select
Edit - Repeat
.
The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the repeat direction.
Specify the number of repeats.
Specify the interval for the repeats.
Specify the offset value to be added to the address for repeats.
3. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
Example: To set 3 repeats in the horizontal direction at an interval of 8 dots with an offset of
2.
8 dots 8 dots 8 dots
Object repeated 3 times horizontally.
Section 5 Object Operations
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The repeat function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.
5-24
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
This section describes the layout functions used to change the size and position of objects on the screen.
1. Select the object for which the size is to be changed.
The cursor shape will change as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the
■
marks at the corners of the object.
2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the object has reached the target size.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Hold down the
Shift
Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.
♦
Hold down the
Ctrl
Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.
♦
The size of a Video Display cannot be changed by using a mouse. To change the size of a Video
Display, use the setting in the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box.
1. Place the cursor on the object to be moved.
If multiple objects are to be moved at the same time, select all those objects.
2. Once the cursor has changed as shown below, drag the object to the desired position.
Drag
5-25
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Once the object has been selected, it can be moved by selecting
Layout – Nudge
or by using the
Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys. Refer to
5-5-6 Nudging Objects
for details.
♦
A Video Display cannot be moved to the outside of the screen.
Distributes multiple objects with top, bottom, left, or right alignment or at equal intervals vertically or horizontally.
Example: Placing Objects at the Top of the Screen
1. Select all objects to be top-aligned.
2. Select
Layout – Align/Distribution – Align Top
.
The selected objects will be top-aligned, in line with the upper coordinates of the object(s) at the top of the screen.
The following table describes the various position alignment functions.
Function Details
Align Left
Aligns objects to the left.
Center in a Column
Align Right
Aligns objects to the center of a column.
Aligns objects to the right.
Align Top
Aligns objects to the top.
Center in a Row
Aligns objects to the center of row.
5-26
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
Function Details
Align Bottom
Aligns objects to the bottom.
Distribute Horizontally
Distributes objects equidistant horizontally.
Distribute Vertically
Distributes objects equidistant vertically.
Aligns the width and height of selected multiple objects.
Example: Aligning Size of Objects with Narrowest Object
1. Select all objects to be aligned by width.
2. Select
Layout – Make Same Size – Smallest Width
.
5-27
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
The following table describes the various size alignment functions.
Function Details
Smallest Width
Largest Width
Smallest Height
Largest Height
Aligns to smallest width.
Aligns to largest width.
Aligns to smallest height.
Aligns to largest height.
Table Column Width
Table Row Height
Aligns to equal widths.
Aligns to equal heights.
5-28
Section 5 Object Operations
Changes the display order of overlapped objects.
Moving Objects to the Front
5-5 Layout Functions
Moving Objects to the Back
1. Select the objects for which the display order is to be changed.
2. Select
Layout – Order – Bring to Front/Send to Back
or
Bring to Front
or
Send to Back
on the toolbar.
Send to Back
Bring to Front
Moves selected objects vertically or horizontally in 1-dot units.
When grids are enabled, the object is moved in the set grid units.
1. Select the object to be nudged.
2. Select
Layout – Nudge
and then select the direction to move the object.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Press the Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys to perform the same operation.
5-29
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
Rotates objects clockwise or counterclockwise or flips objects. Grouped multiple objects can also be rotated or flipped.
Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the object rectangle. Any labels set to functional objects will not, however, be rotated or flipped.
1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.
2. Select
Layout – Rotate/Flip
and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.
Function Details
Rotate Right 90 Degrees
Rotate Left 90 Degrees
Flip Horizontal
Flip Vertical
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
When rotating or flipping grouped objects, the center of the grouped rectangle will be the center for the rotation or flip.
♦
Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.
5-30
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the edit screen or frame.
1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.
2. Select and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.
Function Details
Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame
Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of
Screen/Frame
Flip Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame
Flip Vertical Around Center of Screen/Frame
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.
Corner (node) positions and shapes of polylines, polygons, sectors, and arcs can be changed. Nodes of polylines and polygons can also be deleted or added.
1. Select the fixed object for which the shape is to be changed.
2. Select
Layout - Edit - Edit Node
.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
5-31
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
3. Move the cursor towards the node. When the cursor has changed to a cross (+), drag the cursor to the new position for the node.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes.
1. Select the fixed object to which a node is to be added.
2. Select
Layout – Edit – Add Node
.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
When the cursor is placed on the border of the fixed object, the cursor will change to the following shape.
3. Click the position on the border where a node is to be added. A node will be added between two existing nodes. Nodes can be added until there are only 4 dots or less between two nodes.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the add mode for nodes.
1. Select the fixed object from which a node is to be removed.
2. Select
Layout – Edit – Remove Node
.
The fixed object nodes will be displayed.
The cursor will change to the following shape when brought close to a node.
3. Click the node to be removed.
4. Click the right mouse button to close the remove mode for nodes.
5-32
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
Grouping multiple functional or fixed objects allows them to be handled as one group when editing or adjusting layout. Grouped objects can also be grouped with other functional or fixed objects or placed in other groups.
1. Select the functional or fixed objects to be grouped.
2. Select
Layout – Group
.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for grouping objects are the
Ctrl + G
Keys.
Video Displays and tables cannot be grouped.
The CSV file import/export function can be used to set functional object properties while the functional objects are still grouped (labels, comments, and addresses only). Refer to
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
for information.
Restores grouped functional or fixed objects to individual objects.
1. Select the group to be ungrouped.
2. Select
Layout – Ungroup
.
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for ungrouping objects are the
Ctrl + U
Keys.
Only one group can be ungrouped at a time.
5-33
Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions
Edit the properties of grouped functional or fixed objects using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor over the functional or fixed object to be edited, and double-click the left mouse button.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object A.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for the box.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object C.
Double-click here to open the
Property Dialog Box for object B.
2. The Property Dialog Box for that functional or fixed object will open. Edit the properties as required.
Reference
♦
If the mouse button is double-clicked at a position where two or more functional or fixed objects overlap, the Property Dialog Box for the top object will be opened.
To edit grouped functional or fixed objects as a device library object, select
Edit Smart Active Parts
in the
Edit/Disp
Tab Page opened from the Options Dialog Box (
Tools – Options
).
5-34
Section 5 Object Operations 5-6 Colors
Display colors for functional and fixed objects and other colors are selected in the Color Setting Dialog
Box. There are two kinds of Color Setting Dialog Boxes. Select the Color Setting Dialog Box that will normally be used from the Color Dialog Tab Page under
Tools – Options
. Refer to
5-16 Options
for details.
The method for displaying the Color Setting Dialog Box is described below. Refer to
Setting Colors
under
2-8 Common Functional Object Functions
in the
NS Series Programming Manual
for details on the dialog box.
Click the
Setting
Button next to the color settings column in each Property Setting Dialog Box to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.
Select the object and click the
▼
Button on the color toolbar to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.
5-35
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
Addresses used for referencing data required for display and for storing entered data can be allocated in any PLC area or PT internal memory area. The display status of objects can be changed and the PT status can be controlled and notified by directly writing to and reading from addresses during PT operation.
1
2
No. Setting
1 Address setting
2 Index setting
Details
Enter the addresses to be set. The address can be entered directly. Alternatively, click the
Setting
Button and enter the address in the displayed dialog box. If an invalid address is entered, an error message will be displayed when the
OK
Button is pressed. Invalid addresses cannot be set.
The index setting function is used to allow the addresses allocated to objects to be changed by changing the index attached to a specified area. These variables are called index setting. This enables one object to refer to many addresses. Area types, however, cannot be changed with an index.
There are 10 index settings available (I0 to I9).
Change the contents of system memory to change index setting. ($SW27 to $SW36)
Example Using Indexes
Specified Address: Serial A: HR00000.00I0
The communications address will automatically change based on the I0 value.
I0 ($SW27) value
0
Address
Serial A: HR00000.00
1
2
Serial A:
Serial A:
HR00000.01
HR00000.02
Enter index settings directly into the address input column.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
If the address exceeds the setting range as a result of an index being specified, the address will be invalid and communications will not be processed.
♦
Refer to
2-4 System Memory
in the
NS Series Programming Manual
for details on system memory.
5-36
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
Click the
Setting
Button to the right of the setting column to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
This section describes how to enter addresses using this dialog box.
1
2
3
4
No. Setting
1 Host
2 Area
3 Address
Details
Select the registered host name under
Settings – Register Host
or select the host from PT memory.
Select the communications area.
Word
or
Bit
specification are only displayed when those address types can be set.
For example, the
Word
option will not be displayed when making address settings for ON/OFF Buttons.
Displays and sets the communications address.
The host address is expressed as a 5-digit word address or 5-digit word address and 2-digit bit address. If the address entered here does not have enough digits, the number of digits are automatically adjusted and the address written to the address setting column.
Example: If word “1” is entered as the address:
“00001” will be entered in the address setting column.
Click the
Input
Button to enter the word or bit.
5-37
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
Communications with multiple PLCs is possible with NS-series PTs. Specify a host name and addresses for each connected PLC to allow access to any PLC memory area.
Registering New Hosts
This section describes how to register hosts.
1. Select
Settings – Register Host
.
The Register Host Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Click the
Add
Button.
3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Register all settings in this dialog box.
Enter a host name
(up to 16 characters).
4. Click the
OK
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Up to 98 hosts can be registered, not including Serial A and Serial B.
1. Select the host to be edited.
2. Click the
Edit
Button.
3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Edit the settings in this dialog box.
5-38
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
4. Click the
OK
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when
PLC
has been set to serial ports A and B under
System Setting
.
Only the host name can be changed in these cases.
To delete hosts, set serial ports A and B to
None
under
Settings – System Setting
(
Comm-All
Tab Page).
1. Select the host to be deleted.
2. Click the
Delete
Button.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when
PLC
has been set to serial ports A and B under
System Setting
.
Hosts cannot be deleted using the
Delete
Button in these cases.
♦
If a host address is set to a functional object and that host is subsequently deleted, ??? will be applied as the address host name. An error check can be executed to check for illegal addresses. The alarm/event, Data Log, Data Block, and system memory addresses will not, however, be checked for errors.
Projects with ??? applied as the host name will not operate normally on the PT. Be careful with addresses when hosts are deleted.
1. Select the host to be moved.
2. Click the
Move Up
or
Move Down
Button to move the host up or down.
Reference
♦
“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when
PLC
has been set to serial ports A and B under
System Setting
.
Hosts cannot be moved in these cases.
Furthermore, other hosts cannot be moved above these two hosts.
5-39
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
Use the CSV file import and export functions to edit settings efficiently.
1. Click the
Export CSV
or
Import CSV
Button.
2. To export files, specify the save directory and the file name and then click the
Save
Button. If importing from a CSV file, select the name of the file to be imported and click the
Open
Button.
3. An error check is performed when files are imported and any detected errors are displayed in a dialog box, like the one shown below.
1
2
No. Details
1 Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.
2 Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.
Error No.
1
Details Countermeasure
Format error in imported CSV file. Check that the imported file is in CSV format.
Check that the settings are valid.
2
3
Insufficient memory. Settings contained in CSV file cannot be imported.
Could not open the CSV file. CSV file could not be imported.
Close any unnecessary applications and re-execute the import operation.
Check that the file is not being used by another application. If the file is being used by another application, close the file and then re-execute the import operation.
The output CSV file will be displayed in the following format.
(When displayed using Microsoft Excel.)
The host ID is the number automatically allocated to the host when it is registered. The host ID does not change even if it is different from the number in the Register Host Dialog Box or if the host is deleted.
5-40
Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings
Use 3 onwards when adding new hosts to the imported CSV file. Numbers 1 and 2 are reserved for the following communications settings.
1
2
Serial port A
Serial port B
Note
♦
When CSV files are edited using spreadsheet software, a message warning that some changes may be lost if the file is saved in the current format may be displayed when the file is closed. This will not adversely affect PT operation.
♦
Serial ports A and B can only be added or deleted under
Settings – System Setting
. Serial ports A and B cannot be added by importing CSV files. Serial port A and B information is not output when
CSV files are exported.
5-41
Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
Lists of property settings for functional objects in each screen can be displayed and checked and the order of the listed properties (ID No., comment, label, address, font name, text color, text attributes, color, etc.) can be changed. Also, the display can be changed, using the jump function, to the position of a specified functional object.
1. Either select
Tools – Functional Object List
or click the
Functional Object List
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
No.
Setting
1 Range
Details
Select the range for the functional object list display from
Current Screen
,
Whole
Project
, or
Screens
. If
As Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), the functional objects in sheets will be the range for the list.
Display
Method
The addresses set for one functional object are displayed horizontally on one line. Multiple Addresses in 1
Line
One Address in 1 Line
(Displayed in
Multiple Line)
The addresses set for one functional object are displayed vertically over multiple lines.
2. Make the settings and then click the
Display
Button.
3. The Functional Object List Window will be displayed.
5-42
Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
Properties
Displays the property settings for each functional object.
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for displaying functional object lists are the
Ctrl + L
Keys.
If the same address is used more than once in the same macro, that address is only counted as being used once.
♦
Macro 1
to
Macro 4
only indicate whether or not macros have been set to that functional object.
These display items do not indicate whether or not addresses are used in macros.
Sorts functional object lists in ascending or descending order of properties.
1. Click the titles of the properties to be sorted and select the whole column.
Click here.
2. Click the
Ascending Order
or
Descending Order
Button.
Sorting Addresses in Ascending Order
The addresses are sorted alphabetically, so $B30 is listed in this position.
5-43
Section 5 Object Operations
Sorting Addresses in Descending Order
5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
The addresses are sorted alphabetically, so $B30 is listed in this position.
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a specified object.
1. Click the number of the destination functional object to select the whole row.
Select the destination functional object.
2. Click the
Jump
Button or double-click the selected row.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.
Note
♦
If
Minimize when Jump
is deselected (turned OFF) in the Functional Object List Window, the window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object will flash because it is selected.
5-44
Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists
Saves the contents of the Functional Object List Window to a CSV file.
1. Click the
Save to File
Button in the Functional Object List Window.
2. The Save Used Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.
3. Click the
Save
Button.
Click the
Display
Button in the Functional Object List Dialog Box to redisplay the list to change the display range or refresh the display.
5-45
Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
Lists the number of functional objects in the whole project or in a specified screen.
The display can also be changed (using the jump function) from the list to a specified screen.
The method for displaying a list of used functional objects is described below.
1. Either select
Tools – List Up Functional Objects Used
or click the
List Up Functional Objects
Used
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
No. Setting
1 Range
Details
Select either
Screen
or
Whole Project
as the search range for the list of functional objects used. If
As Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets will be the range for the search. Select
Whole Project
and select (turn ON)
Also
Display Unused Screen No.
to included unused screens in the search range.
2. Make the settings and then click the
Find
Button.
5-46
Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
3. The number of functional objects used are displayed in a tree structure for each screen, frame, and table.
Click
+
to expand the tree.
Screens with the functional object are displayed in green and those without the functional object are displayed in red.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. Details
1
2
3
Displays the screen page number.
Displays the number of functional objects in each screen.
Displays the screen title.
4
5
Click
+
to expand the tree.
The number of functional objects in the frame are displayed for each frame page.
6 Displays the number of functional objects in tables.
5-47
Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog
Box to a specified screen or table or frame screen position.
1. Click the destination screen, table, or frame to select it.
Click here.
2. Click the
Jump
Button.
The selected screen will be opened. Alternatively, the table or frame will flash to indicate that it has been selected.
When a Screen Is Selected. When a Table or Frame Is Selected.
Reference
♦
The jump operation can also be performed by double-clicking on the screen or table/frame line.
5-48
Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings
•
•
•
Changes settings for the main properties of multiple functional objects of the same type from the functional object list. Settings for the following properties can be changed as a batch.
Comments
Labels
Addresses
Functional objects can also be added to or deleted from lists.
Properties for each functional object can be set as a batch. This section describes how to change settings using ON/OFF Button functional objects as an example.
1. Select the functional objects for which the properties are to be set together.
Drag
2. Select
Settings – Change Settings at Once
.
Reference
♦
The shortcut keys for changing functional object settings as a batch are the
Ctrl + K
Keys.
The Change Settings at Once Window will be displayed. The properties for the selected functional object will be displayed in a list.
3. Double-click the cell for the property items to be set to enter input mode.
Input mode
5-49
Section 5 Object Operations
4. Enter the settings data.
5-10 Batch Settings
5. Click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
Addresses can also be set from the Address Setting Dialog Box.
Click the
Set Address
Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.
The batch-setting function cannot be used if functional objects of different types are selected. ♦
♦
The batch-setting function cannot be used if frames or tables are selected.
New functional objects can be created from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box by adding a line.
1. Click a line to select it.
Click here.
2. Click the
Add Line
Button.
A new line will be added directly below the selected line. An ID number will be automatically added, using the next lowest free number.
A line is added.
Reference
♦
The Add Line function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.
5-50
Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings
3. Click the
OK
Button. The newly added functional object will be displayed at the top left of the screen.
A new functional object is added.
Functional objects can be deleted by deleting lines from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box.
1. Click the line for the functional object to be deleted.
Click here.
2. Click the
Delete Line
Button.
3. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to delete the line (and the object).
The line will be deleted.
A line is deleted.
5. Click the
OK
Button. The functional object will be deleted from the screen.
Reference
♦
If the operation to delete all lines is performed, all selected lines will be deleted, but a new line will be added and a new functional object of the same type will be created.
5-51
Section 5 Object Operations
The settings in each cell can be cut, copied, or pasted.
1. Click the cell with the settings to be cut or copied.
Select the settings item to be copied.
5-10 Batch Settings
2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select
Cut
or
Copy
from the displayed pop-up menu.
Click the right mouse button.
3. Click the cell where the settings data is to be pasted.
Select the target cell.
4. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select
Paste
from the displayed pop-up menu.
Click the right mouse button.
5-52
Section 5 Object Operations
The cut or copied data will be pasted.
5-10 Batch Settings
Reference
♦
Multiple settings can be selected and copied and pasted. Select all the target cells when performing the paste operation.
♦
♦
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for cutting settings are the
Ctrl + X
Keys.
The shortcut keys for copying settings are the
Ctrl + C
Keys.
The shortcut keys for pasting settings are the
Ctrl + V
Keys.
The shortcut key for clearing cells is the
Delete
Key.
Duplicates the settings for a selected cell. Addresses or character strings can be copied along with specified offsets for numeric values contained in them.
1. Click the settings item to be repeated.
Select the settings item to be repeated.
2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select
Repeat
from the displayed pop-up menu.
Click the right mouse button.
The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.
5-53
Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings
1
2
No. Setting
1 No. of Repetitions
2 Replace
Details
Sets the number of repetitions.
Replaces existing data with the repeat string.
Replace Number in
Character String
String Type
If
Replace Number in Character String
is selected (turned ON), the numeric value in the character string is incremented and the string is copied.
Offset
Select
Character
to replace numeric values in comment or label strings. Select
Address
to replace numbers in addresses.
Example:
Character
– Button 1, Button 2, Button 3,…
Address
−
$B0, $B1, $B2,….
Specifies the offset value to be added to the numeric value being replaced.
3. Make the settings and then click the
Repeat
Button.
5-54
Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used
Displays a list of the number of functional objects using each address and a list of functional objects using each address. Can also jump to specified functional object screen positions.
Displays a list of addresses that are used.
1. Either select
Tools – List Up Addresses Used
or click the
List Up Addresses Used
Button on the toolbar.
Toolbar
The List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
No. Setting
1 Search
Details
Specifies the conditions for the address search.
Address Sets the start address for the search range.
No. of Addresses Specifies how many words or bits to search for from the address specified under
Address
.
Search until Max
No.
2 No. of Addresses
Displayed in 1 Line
3 Range
Select (turn ON)
Search until Max No.
to search until the largest bit or word from the address specified under
Address
.
Sets the number of addresses displayed in one line.
Select the search range from
Current Screen
,
Whole Project
, or
Screens
. If
As
Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets will be the display range.
2. Make the settings and then click the
Search
Button.
3. The used bits and words are displayed for each address.
White: Displays the number of used bits and words.
5-55
Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used
Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.
1. Click the
Save to File
Button.
2. The Save List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.
3. Click the
Save
Button.
4. A dialog box to notify that the save operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button.
Reference
♦
An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and separated by commas.
5-56
Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used
Prints search results.
1. Click the
Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button.
Note
♦
An example of print output is given below.
List Up Addresses Used
Addresses
Click the
Search
Button and make the settings again in the List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box to re-specify the search range or refresh the data.
5-57
Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used
Displays a list of the functional objects that use the selected addresses.
1. Click the cell for the target address. The functional objects using that address will be displayed.
2. Click the
Details
Button or double-click the cell.
Double-click the cell.
A list of the functional objects using the specified address will be displayed.
No. of searches
Displays a list of the screen page number where address located, functional object ID number, comment, and label.
The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a selected functional object.
1. Select the target functional object.
2. Click the
Jump
Button or double-click the selected row.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.
Reference
♦
If
Minimize when Jump
is deselected (turned OFF) in the List Up Addresses Used Window, the window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object will flash because it is selected.
5-58
Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects in each screen. Addresses allocated to each functional object can also be replaced and search results can be output to files or printed.
Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects.
1. Select
Tools – Address Cross Reference
.
2. The Address Cross Reference Window will be displayed. Set the search conditions.
1
2
No. Setting
1 Range
Details
Select either
Whole Project
or
Screen
as the search range for the address cross reference display. If
As Sheet No
is selected (turned ON), address cross references in sheets will be the range for the search.
Executes the search and displays a list of search results.
Display Area
3. Make the settings and then click the
Find
Button.
A list of search results will be displayed.
Addresses and Functional Object ID Numbers (Screen Page Numbers)
Note: An “S” will appear before sheet page numbers.
Example: PB0001(S3) is an ON/OFF Button on sheet page 3.
5-59
Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
Reference
♦
♦
The shortcut keys for displaying address cross references are the
Ctrl + R
Keys.
If
Screen
is selected for the range, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be displayed.
Settings - Flicker Setting
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
Settings - Data Log Setting
Settings - Data Block Setting
Settings - System Setting
Settings - Project Properties - Macro
Settings - Screen Properties - Macro
After searches have been executed, addresses allocated to functional objects can be replaced in one operation.
1. Click the
Replace
Button.
2. The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed. Refer to
Replace
in
5-4 Editing
for detailed settings.
Reference
♦
When replacing an address set as a flicker or alarm/event setting, or as a data block interlock address, include the relay number in the specified address. Replacement will not be performed properly if the relay number is not specified.
Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.
1. Click the
Save to File
Button.
2. The Save Cross Reference Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.
5-60
Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
3. Click the
Save
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and separated by commas.
Prints a list of search results.
1. Click the
Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
An example of print output is given below.
Cross-reference
Address Functional object ID (Page) (Sn=sheet)
5-61
Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses
Click the
Find
Button to re-specify the search range or refresh the data.
•
•
•
•
Displays detailed information for the functional objects that use the specified addresses. The following information is displayed.
Screen page numbers where the functional object is located.
ID number
Comment
Label
1.
2.
Select the addresses for which detailed information is required.
Double-click the selected row or click the
Details
Button.
The Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.
Jumps to specified functional object screen paste positions.
1. Click a functional object to select it.
2. Double-click the selected row or click the
Jump
Button.
The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.
5-62
Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
A library is a collection of objects with set properties. Grouped objects can also be registered in the library.
Library objects can be easily placed and used as a single object on other projects or screens.
An object and all of its properties settings can be registered to a library as one object.
1. Select the object to be registered to a library.
2. Either select
Tools – Register Library
or click the
Register Library
Button on the toolbar.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be registered in the library.
The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
No. Setting
1 Category
Details
Displays the library configuration on a menu tree. Click
+
to expand the display to lower categories.
2 Category
3 Preview
4 Title
The category corresponds to the folder where the registered library objects are stored for easy management.
Displays a preview of the library object registered to the selected category.
Click the @ to select. The border will be displayed in red.
Displays the title of the selected library object.
5-63
Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
4. Select the storage locations of the category where the library is registered and the preview column.
5. Click the
Register
Button.
6. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the title for the library object to be registered and click the
OK
Button.
7. Make the settings and then click the
Close
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
If the
Register
Button is clicked while a location where library objects are registered is selected, the existing library objects will be overwritten.
This section describes how to share objects registered in the library and place these objects on screens.
1. Either select
Tools – Use Library
or click the
Use Library
Button on the toolbar.
The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Specify the category and select the library object to be shared in the preview column.
5-64
Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
3. Click the
Use
Button.
The Library Dialog Box will be minimized and the library object will be placed on the upper left of the screen.
Categories and library objects are managed and registration data is changed from the Library Dialog
Box.
Either select
Tools – Use Library
or click the
Use Library
Button on the toolbar to display the Library
Dialog Box.
Adding Categories
1. Select the category above where a new category is to be added.
Example: Adding a “Command Button” below “Buttons”
2. Click the
New Category
Button to create a new category.
3. Enter the category name.
5-65
Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
1. Select the category to be deleted.
2. Click the
Delete Category
Button.
3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Be careful when deleting categories because all library objects registered in that category will also be deleted.
1. Select the category for which the name is to be changed.
2. Click the
Change Name
Button.
The category name will be displayed in reverse video and can now be edited.
This section describes how to cut or copy objects in the library and paste them to other categories.
1. Select the library object to be cut or copied.
2. Click the
Cut
or
Copy
Button.
3. Select the category where the object is to be pasted from the list of categories.
4. Click the
Paste
Button.
Deletes objects from the library.
1. Select the library object to be deleted. the Button.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
In contrast to the cut operation, deleted library objects cannot be pasted elsewhere. Be careful when deleting objects.
5-66
Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects
Changes library object titles.
1. Select the library object for which the title is to be changed.
2. Click the
Change Title
Button.
3. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the new title and click the
OK
Button.
Data is refreshed from the Library Dialog Box.
Click the
Update
Button.
The view function opens and displays library object previews in a separate dialog box. If the library object is smaller than the display area in the dialog box, the object will be displayed at full size. If the object is larger than the display area, the size will be adjusted to fit the display area.
Click the
View
Button.
The library object will be displayed in a different dialog box.
Section 5 Object Operations
5-67
Section 5 Object Operations 5-14 Object Defaults
Property settings when objects are placed on screens can be specified.
Defaults can be set for each functional object type and common fixed object defaults can be set.
Specific property values are registered as defaults. Registered properties are used as the defaults for the subsequent functional or fixed objects created.
1. Display the Property Dialog Box for the functional or fixed object with the properties to be registered as defaults.
2. Select (turn ON)
Use as default
.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Whether or not
Record Operation Log
in the Write Tab Page is checked cannot be set as a default.
Returns properties registered as defaults to the NS-Designer default settings.
1. Select
Settings – Reset Defined Default
and then select
Functional Object/Fixed Object
.
2. A dialog box to confirm the reset operation will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button.
5-68
Section 5 Object Operations 5-14 Object Defaults
3. A dialog box to notify that the reset operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button.
5-69
Section 5 Object Operations 5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps
Image editing software can be started and BMP or JPEG files of background bitmaps can be created and edited.
1. Select .
The image editor will open.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
♦
If a background bitmap has been set already, that data will be read automatically.
If new BMP or JPEG files are to be used as background bitmaps, settings must be made in the
Screen Properties Dialog Box. Refer to
4-1 Basic Operations
for details.
♦
The image editor that will be opened depends on the settings under
Tools – Options
. Refer to
5-16
Options
for details.
This menu cannot be selected if no image editor has been set.
5-70
Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options
Makes optional settings for NS-Designer operations.
1. Select .
The Option Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the settings and then click the
OK
Button.
Optional settings consist of the 3 types shown below.
Selects the type of Set Color Dialog Box that will be displayed for setting colors. If
User Palette
is selected, up to 15 colors can be registered on the palette.
Click the
Test
Button to display a sample dialog box.
Makes the settings for editing objects.
1
2
3
4
5
No. Setting
1 Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object
Details
Select this option to display the Property Setting Dialog Box immediately after pasting an object.
Select this option to prohibit functional objects from overlapping. 2 Prohibit functional objects from overlapping
3 Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects
Select this option to display a confirmation dialog box when cutting or deleting objects.
4
5
Show ID and address with small font
Edit Smart Active Parts
(SAP)
Select this option to display the ID number in small font when displaying the ID.
Select this option to open the property dialog of frames and functional objects that compose Smart Active Parts (SAP) without ungrouping the objects/frames. By enabling this option, objects can also be moved and the size of the objects can be changed.
5-71
Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
Fixed objects can still be overlapped even if
Prohibit functional objects from overlapping
is selected
(turned ON).
Specifies the editor used when editing text or bitmap files.
1
2
No. Setting
1 Text
Details
Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing text files.
2 Image Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing bitmap files.
R e f f e r r e n c e
♦
The executable file path for each editor depends on the operating system.
Re-specify the editor execution file if the operating system has been changed.
Object Operations Section 5
The magnification can be specified for automatic adjustment of font sizes set for labels in functional objects.
1
2
3
4
No. Setting
1 Scale
Details
Set the scale for automatically adjusting the font size. The magnification can be set between 50 and 100 (default: 80).
Display the information on text attributes in the sample display.
Attribute
5-72
Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options
No. Setting
3 Text Attribute
Details
Display the text attributes dialog box by clicking this button. The information on text attributes set here is displayed as the sample text attributes.
4 Sample Display as a sample the information after changing automatic adjustment scale or font attributes.
1
R e f f e r r e n c e
The font size and text color cannot be changed in the text attributes dialog box. The scale of raster fonts also cannot be changed. Therefore, font name pull-down menus are not displayed.
2
The following message will be displayed if the screen data being edited has not been saved when the Label Tab is selected from
Tools – Options
.
3
If this screen is displayed for screen data that has already been saved, click the
Yes
Button and save the screen data. Click the
No
Button to return to the Label Tab without saving the screen data.
Set the scale level and then click the
OK
Button in the option dialog box. The following message will be displayed.
Section 5
Click the
Yes
Button to select fitting to the Object Size using the set scale. This setting will apply to all the functional object labels for which the option
Fit the object size
is selected.
Object Operations
5-73
Section 6 Programming Macros
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Macros are functions that execute extra user-specified programs for projects, screens, and functional objects.
Arithmetic operations, discrimination between conditions, and other functions that are not normally supported can be added by the user.
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros
Macros can be registered to projects, screens, and functional objects.
Register the macro by selecting the macro execution conditions and inputting the macro program in the
Edit Macro Dialog Box.
Click the OK Button after editing the macro to execute an error check. When an error is detected, an error message will be displayed in the error list. Refer to
6-2 List of Error Messages
for details on the messages displayed when errors occur. Macro editing cannot be exited until no errors occur.
1
2
3
4
No. Setting
1
2
3
Details
Execution Condition Displays the execution conditions for the selected macro.
Program
Select Command
The field used to input the macro program. Up to 3,000 characters can be input for one macro.
When a command is selected from the combo box, an explanation of the selected command will be displayed above the combo box. Click the Insert Button to insert the selected command in the program input field.
4 Error List Click the OK Button to display the error messages for the errors detected when the error check is executed.
When each error in the error list is double-clicked, the cursor will move to the position in the program input field where the error was detected.
Reference
♦
Refer to the online manual under
Macro
in the Manual Folder in the NS-Designer Program Folder for information on macro programming methods. To access the manual, however, the online manual option must be selected when installing the NS-Designer.
6-1
Section 6 Programming Macros
Use the following procedure to register macros to projects.
1. Select
Settings - Project properties
.
2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the
Macro
Tab.
6-1 Registering Macros
3. Select from the following four execution conditions.
Macro execution condition
When Loading a Project
On timing Alarm/Event occurred
Description
Executes the macro immediately before loading the first screen after a project is opened.
Executes the macro when an alarm occurs.
On timing Alarm/Event is cancelled Executes the macro when the alarm is cleared.
When a bit changed/When a value changed
Executes the macro when the bit of the specified address turns ON or
OFF or when the value of the word of the specified address changes.
4. Click the
Edit Macro
Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the
OK
Button.
6-2
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros
No.
1
Setting
Select
Details
Selects the bit change macro to set from
When a bit changed 1
to
When a bit changed 10.
Causes the bit change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.
3 value
Action timing Sets the timing for executing the macro.
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON or OFF.
ON/OFF
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON.
ON
Executes the macro when the specified bit turns OFF.
OFF
No.
1
2
3
4
Setting
Select
Set x when a value changed
Address
Storage type
Details
Selects the bit change macro to set from
When a value changed 1
to
When a value changed 10.
Causes the value change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.
Specify the communications address to be monitored.
Sets the storage type of the communications address to one of the following 10 types:
INT (signed 1 word)
UINT (unsigned 1 word)
DINT (signed 2 words)
UDINT (unsigned 2 words)
BCD2 (unsigned 1 word)
BCD2 (unsigned 2 words)
BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 1 word)
BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 2 words)
BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 1 word)
BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 2 words)
6-3
Section 6 Programming Macros
No.
Setting
6 value
Set value comparison macro
Value = Set value
Value > Set value
Value < Set value
6-1 Registering Macros
Details
Executes when the value at the communications address changes.
Executes the macro as given below based on comparing the value stored at the specified address and the set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address equals the set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is greater than the set value.
Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is less than the set value.
Reference
♦
If the bits/values at specified addresses changed at the same time, macros are executed in the following order.
Case
Specified addresses for macros turn ON/OFF at the same time.
Macro execution order
Executed in order from
When a bit changed 10.
When a bit changed 1
to
The same address is specified for multiple bit change macros.
Executed in order from
When a bit changed 10.
When a bit changed 1
to
The values for specified addresses for macros change at the same time.
Executed in order from to
When a value changed 1
When a value changed 10.
The same address is specified for multiple value change macros.
Executed in order from to
When a value changed 1
When a value changed 10.
The address set for an alarm/event macro turns ON at the same time as an address for a bit/value change macro changes.
Executed in order from the trigger macro and then the alarm/event macro.
Use the following procedure to register macros to screens.
1. Select
Settings
-
Screen properties
.
2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the
Macro
Tab.
3. Select from the following execution conditions.
6-4
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros
Macro execution condition
When Loading a Screen
When Unloading a Screen
Description
Executes the macro immediately before displaying the screen after it is opened.
Executes the macro immediately before the page is switched after closing the screen.
4. Click the
Edit Macro
Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the
OK
Button.
Use the following procedure to register macros to functional objects.
1. Display the Properties Dialog Box for the functional object where the macro is to be registered.
2. Select
Display Expansion Tab
at the bottom left of the dialog box, and then select the
Macro
Tab that is displayed.
3. Select from the following execution conditions. The execution condition depends on the functional object used.
6-5
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros
Macro execution condition
Touch ON Timing
Description
Executes macro the instant the functional object is pressed.
Touch OFF Timing
Before Inputting Numeral/
String
Executes macro the instant the functional object is released after being pressed.
Executes the macro immediately before the tenkey and virtual keyboard for inputting numerals and character strings are displayed.
Before Writing Numeral/String Executes the macro immediately before the host is notified of the numeral or character string that was input.
When Changing Numeral/
String
Executes the macro when the value in the address changes.
Executes the macro the instant the alarm display area is pressed. When Pressing a Display
Area
When Selecting an
Alarm/Event
When Selecting a List
Executes the macro immediately after selecting each alarm/event that is displayed in the Alarm/Event Summary History field.
Executes the macro immediately after selecting a line from the list selection objects.
4. Click the
Edit Macro
Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.
5. Input the program and then click the
OK
Button.
6-6
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros
The execution conditions that can be selected for each functional object are shown in the following table.
Functional object
ON/OFF Buttons
Numeral Displays & Inputs
String Displays & Inputs
Text
Bitmap
Date
Time
Data Block Table
Touch
ON
Timing
Touch
OFF
Timing
When
Changing
Numeral/
String
No
Before
Inputting
Numeral/
String
No
Before
Writing
Numeral/
String
No
When
Selecting a List
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No No No No
Yes Yes No No No No
No No Yes No No No
No No Yes No No No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No No Yes No Yes No
No No No No No No
No No No No No Yes
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No Yes Yes No
No No No No No No
Alarm/Event Objects
Functional object
Alarm/Event Display
Alarm/Event Summary & History
When Pressing a Display Area
Yes
No
When Selecting an Alarm/Event
No
Yes
6-7
Section 6 Programming Macros 6-2 List of Error Messages
The following table shows the details of error messages that are displayed in the Error List field after executing an error check.
Error message
Format error
Variable name error
( is missing
No. of ( ) does not agree
Position of , is incorrect
Function argument error
= command error
Details
The program contains elements other than variable name, function name, or programming that cannot be interpreted.
A variable name is incorrect.
The ( (left parentheses symbol) is missing from a function or sentence.
The number of ( ) (parentheses) in the program do not agree.
The position of the , (comma) in the program is incorrect.
The program contains an incorrect function argument, such as word memory being set in a position that permits bit memory only. Check the arguments that can be set by referring to
2-1 Function Argument Table
in the
NS12 Macro
Reference
included on the NS-Designer CD-ROM.
The program contains an incorrect substitution statement, such as 3=10 or
$B0=3.
End of program is incomplete The program that was input is incomplete.
If sentence error The program contains an incorrect IF, ELSE, or ENDIF statement.
, or ; is missing
FOR sentence error
The , (comma) after the function argument is missing or the program is not divided using a ; (semicolon).
A value outside the range 0 to 32767 is set for n in a FOR (n) statement, or
FOR is nested to more than 1 level.
6-8
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes how to set the PT’s operating parameters and address allocations.
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select
Settings
-
System Setting
. The System Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
7-1 Settings
Click the
PT
Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. Setting
1 Startup Wait Time
Details
Set the time required before the PT starts communicating with external devices after turning ON the power or resetting the PT. The startup waiting time can be set to between 0 and 10 (unit: s).
2 Key Press Sound Select whether an input sound will be heard when an object is pressed.
ON: Input sound enabled
OFF: Input sound disabled
Select whether a buzzer will be heard.
ON:
OFF:
The buzzer is enabled at the following times:
•
When system memory bits $SB12 to $SB14 are ON
•
When an error occurs in the PT
•
When a message is displayed for the “
×
” and “!” icons
The buzzer is disabled
Screen Saver
Movement
Screen Saver
Startup Time
Changing Value
ERROR ON: The buzzer is enabled at the following times:
•
•
When an error occurs in the PT
When a message is displayed for the “
×
” and “!” icons
Set the various screen saver settings.
Select one of the following screen saver operations.
Display Erased: Erases the screen when it is idle for a specified time.
OFF: Disables the screen saver.
Set the amount of time after which the screen saver will start up. The time can be set to between 1 and 255 (unit: s).
Set whether to enable or disable changing monitor values for addresses displayed on the device monitor screen on the PT.
Enable: Monitor value can be changed.
Disable: Monitor value cannot be changed.
7-1
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
No. Setting Details
notification Select to prioritize notification of ON/OFF Button notification. of ON/OFF Button
Click the
Initial
Tab.
7-1 Settings
1
2
3
4
5
Setting Details
1 Initial Select the initial screen to be displayed when the PT starts operation.
Set the addresses where system memory is allocated. 2 System
$SB
Allocation Address
$SW
Allocation Address
System bit memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $B. Set the address to a multiple of 16. When $SB is allocated as host memory, the bit number is not set.
A total of 53 bits of bit memory starting from the specified address will be used as system memory.
Example: If Serial A is set to DM 00000, the correspondence with $SB is as follows:
$SB0 Serial A: DM 00000.00
$SB1 Serial A: DM 00000.01 to
$SB52 Serial A: DM 00003.04
System word memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $W.
A total of 39 words of word memory starting from the specified address are used as system memory.
Set the system memory update cycle and RUN signal (pulse) interval. 3 Options
$SB, $SW Update Cycle
Set the update cycle for $SB and $SW. The cycle can be set to between 1 and 256.
Intervals of RUN
Signal (Pulse)
Set the communications interval for writing RUN signals. The interval can be set to between 1 and 256.
Click the System Memory List Button to display the System Memory List.
List Button
5 Memory Card Free
Space Check Flag
Set the amount of free space on the Memory Card for which to issue an alarm. If the free space on the Memory Card inserted in the PT is at or below the amount of free space set here, $SB48 will turn ON.
7-2
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
Reference
♦
Set internal memory for both $SB and $SW allocation addresses or set the same host address for both for them.
Example $SB: Serial A: 00000
$SW: Serial A: DM 00000
Set the same host name (Serial A) for both $SB and $SW.
♦
TIM, CNT, TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SB.
♦
♦
TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SW.
Refer to
2-4 System Memory
in the
NS Series Programming Manual
for details on the system memory.
♦
When changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for whether the communications port, the
Ethernet, and Controller Link are used, close the System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host address in $SB or $SW.
Data is updated between $SB/$SW and the allocated addresses each time the number of communications cycles specified in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field is processed.
Example: When the $SB, $SW Update Cycle is set to three cycles.
1 2 3
Updating
$SB/$SW
1 2 3
Updating
$SB/$SW
Communications cycle
(time for all required communications to complete one cycle.)
Communications cycle
(time for all required communications to complete one cycle.)
Reference
♦
The $SB and $SW are also updated when a project starts loading, switching base screens, opening or closing pop-up screens, and switching frames. After updating during these operations, updating is performed according to the setting in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field.
The RUN signal ($SB0, $SB1) is output after $SB and $SW are refreshed the number of times set for the RUN Signal Pulse Interval.
Example: The following illustration is for when the RUN Signal Pulse Interval is set to 3.
1
$SB and $SW refreshed
2
$SB and $SW refreshed
3
$SB and $SW refreshed
1
$SB and $SW refreshed
Communications cycle (All required communications completed once.)
RUN Signal output.
7-3
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
Click the
System Memory List
Button on the Initial Tab Page to display the Initial Value for System
Memory Dialog Box.
The $SB and $SW can be set to communicate with the PLC allocation addresses set in the Initial Tab
Page.
$SB and $SW addresses are divided into functional groups, and the user can select the groups for which to perform communications. By selecting items, communications will be performed between the selected area and the PLC address.
The default setting is for only Screen (communications with $SW0). Change the settings as required.
The above setting example is set for communications as follows:
$SW0 Serial A: DM 01000
$SW10 to $SW13 Serial A: DM 01010 to DM 01013
Reference
♦
The $SB bits and $SW words that are not selected in the Initial Value for the System Memory Dialog Box are set to not communicate with the PLC, and can be used. (When bits and words are not selected, it does not indicate that their use is prohibited.)
Click the
History
Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
7-4
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
No. Setting
1 Number of Operation Log Records
Details
Set the number of logging records to be saved in a single file. The number of records can be set to between 0 and 1,024.
Set to 0 if it is not necessary to save records.
2 Use Ring Buffer Select to record data in a ring buffer. When this setting is selected, if the maximum number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is recorded. When this setting is not selected, no more data will be recorded once the set maximum is reached.
3 Character Code for
Log File
Select the character code (ASCII or Unicode) for alarm/event histories, data logs, operation logs, and error logs.
Set the format for outputting the data log to a CSV file.
5
Format
Save the data with offset time display format
Select to display the time as an offset when outputting log data from the data log to a CSV file.
This tab page is used to set the communications destination. Click the
Comm-All
Tab.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7-5
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
No. Setting
1 Serial Port A
Details
Select
None
,
PLC
,
Bar-Code Reader
,
Temperature Controller
,
Memory Link
, or
Modem for
Data Transfer
for the communications destination.
One bar code can be set for each project.
2 Serial Port B Select
None
,
PLC
,
Bar-Code Reader
,
Temperature Controller
,
Memory Link
, or
Modem for
Data Transfer
for the communications destination.
One bar code can be set for each project.
Communicate with an expansion interface
Select this option when using an Expansion Interface for serial communications (NS5 only).
This option is for future expansion only. Do not normally select it.
3 Ethernet
4 Controller Link
Select whether Ethernet will be used.
Disabled: Ethernet communications not used.
Enabled: Ethernet communications used.
Select whether Controller Link will be used.
Disabled: Controller Link communications not used.
Enabled: Controller Link communications used.
5 Comm. Time Out Sets the time for the timeout error when a response is not received from the host. The timeout monitor time can be set to between 1 and 10 (unit: s).
6 Retry Set the number of communications retries before an error screen will be displayed when a communications error occurs while communicating with the host. If communications are unsuccessful after the number of communications retries specified in this setting have been executed, processing set for communications auto-recovery under
Comm. Auto-return
will be executed.
The number of retries can be set to between 0 and 255 times.
7 Routing Table Setting
9 Comm. Details Button
Click the
Routing Table Setting
Button to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box.
Select whether or not to use communications auto-recovery.
Yes: Retries communications when a communications error occurs, without displaying the
Error Message Dialog Box.
No: Displays the Error Message Dialog Box when a communications error occurs. Click the
OK Button in the Error Message Dialog Box to retry communications.
Click this button to display a dialog box for making advanced communications settings.
Reference
♦
To change the communications port setting, the screen data must be changed.
Example: Changing from using serial port A only to serial port B.
1. Click the
Comm-All
Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and change
None
to
PLC
for serial port B (leave the serial port A set to
PLC
).
The host is registered automatically under these conditions. (The default host name is Serial B.)
2. When creating functional objects that will communicate with the PLC connected to serial port B, set the host name to
Serial B
and set the address.
When changing the communications destination of the existing functional objects to the PLC connected to serial port B, change the host name from
Serial A
(default host name when using serial port A) to
Serial B
.
Functions such as
Replace
(refer to
5-4 Editing
) and
Change Settings at Once
(refer to
5-10
Batch Settings
) are useful here. Settings can be changed efficiently by using the
Import CSV File
and
Export CSV File
functions (refer to
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
).
When the
Import/Export CSV File
functions are used, the whole file is exported to a CSV file, after which the exported file can be opened and functions such as
Replace
can be used to change
Serial A
to
Serial B
. (Indirect addresses and other data are not included in the CSV file. The allocations for these data must be changed separately using the NS-Designer.)
3. When serial port A is not used, click the
Comm-All
Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and change the serial port A setting from
PLC
to
None
.
7-6
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
♦
When the settings for whether the communications ports are used have been changed, close the
System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host address in $SB or $SW. Until the System Setting
Dialog Box is closed, the settings that existed prior to the changes are still enabled, and the new host setting cannot be specified in the system memory allocation addresses.
Click the
Routing Table
Button on the Comm. All Tab Page to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog
Box.
The routing tables consist of a local network table and remote network table. Routing tables are required to use messages on a Controller Link Network.
Local PT
Communications path
Communications partner
7-7
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
The local network table is shown on the left side of the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box. The setting for Serial Port A, Serial Port B, Ethernet, and Controller Link Tabs are shown.
Number Setting
1
2
3
NTLK0
NTLK1
ETN
Details
Information for serial port A is shown. The unit number and local network address are fixed.
•
•
Unit number: 34
Local network address: 111
•
•
Information for serial port B is shown. The unit number and local network address are fixed.
Unit number: 39
Local network address112
Information for Ethernet is shown. The unit number is fixed.
•
•
Unit number: 17
Local network address: The number set on the Ethernet Tab
Page is shown.
4
CLK Information for Controller link is shown. The unit number is fixed.
•
•
Unit number: 18
Local network address: The number set on the Controller Link
Tab Page is shown.
Reference
♦
Close the System Setting Dialog Box after changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for whether communications ports are used, or after changing settings on the Ethernet or Controller
Link Tab Pages. The previous setting will remain until the dialog box has been closed.
7-8
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
The remote network table provides the node and network address corresponding to the initial relay point (first point the data must pass) en route to a target network (end network) not directly connected to the local PLC. The table specifies the route from the relay point to the end network.
Local PT Relay PLC (a) Relay PLC (b) Destination
Network 1
Network 2
Network 3
1
2
3
Number Setting
1
2
Destination Network
Address
Remote Network
Address
3
Gateway Node Address
Details
Set the target network address. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.
Set the network address of the first point on the way to the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.
Set the node address of the first relay point on the way to the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.
The following diagram shows an example of a system connection and its routing tables.
PT at local node
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3
Relay PLC
(a)
Node 1
Node 2
Relay PLC
(b)
Node 1
Destination
Node 2
Network 1
Network 2
Network 3
Relay Network Table for Local PT
Relay Network Table for PLC (a)
Destination network address
Relay network address
Gateway node address
Destination network address
3 1 3
Relay network address
3 2
Gateway node address
2
Relay Network Table for PLC (b)
Destination network address
Relay network address
Gateway node address
1 2 1
Relay Network Table for Destination Node
Destination network address
Relay network address
Gateway node address
1 3 1
Meaning: To go to network 3, first go to node 3 of network 1.
Meaning: To go to network 3, first go to node 2 of network 2.
Meaning: To go to network 1, first go to node 1 of network 2.
Meaning: To go to network 1, first go to node 1 of network 3.
7-9
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
The Comm. Details Dialog Box will be displayed if the
Comm. Details
Button is clicked on the
Comm-All Tab page.
Set the interval of message communications, i.e., the time from starting all communications required on the screen until the next communications are started. The interval can be set to between 2 and 200 ms.
The following examples illustrate operation when the interval set here differs from the time required for actual communications.
Example: Actual Communications Longer than Set Interval
Message communications interval
(setting)
Actual communications interval
All communications are completed before starting communications again.
Example: Actual Communications Shorter than Set Interval
Message communications interval
(setting)
Actual communications interval
Communications are not started again until the set interval has expired.
The advanced settings are used to set the details of the communications method selected from the Comm-All
Tab Page.
7-10
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
Select
PLC
or
Bar-Code Reader
under
Serial Port A
or
Serial Port B
in the Comm-All Tab Page to enable the Serial Port A Tab Page or Serial Port B Tab Page.
When Communications Destination Is Set to
PLC
:
1
2
3
No. Setting
1 Protocol
Details
Select the protocol from 1: 1 NT Link, 1: N NT Link, or Host Link.
Using both serial ports A and B Supported/not supported
1: 1 NT Link + 1: 1 NT Links
1: 1 NT Link + 1: N NT Links
1: N NT Links + 1: N NT Links
Supported
Supported
Supported
2 Comm.
3 NT Link (1: N)
Unit No.
Select the communications speed. The communications speed range depends on the protocol setting. Refer to the following table for applicable ranges.
Protocol Transfer speed selection range
1: N NT Links Normal or high-speed
1: 1 NT Link No settings
Host Link 9,600 or 19,200 bps
Select the unit number for the 1: N NT Link from 0 to 7. When a 1: 1 NT Link is selected as the protocol, this setting is not required.
7-11
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
When Communications Destination Is Set to
Bar-Code Reader
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-1 Settings
No. Setting
1 Data
2 Stop
3 Parity
Details
Select the data bit length for the bar code reader from 7 or 8 bits.
Select the data stop bit length for the bar code reader from 1 or 2 bits.
Select the data parity bits for the bar code reader from none, even, or odd.
Select the baud rate for communications with the bar code reader from 4,800, 9,600, or
19,200 bps.
5 BCR Select the confirmation method used after inputting data in the input column from the following options.
Auto: Automatically confirms data when it is read from the bar code reader.
Manual: Confirms data when the Enter Key is pressed. Data and character strings can be added.
6 Continuous Set whether to move focus to the next object when confirming bar code inputs. This set-
Input ting can be enabled when
BCR Input
is set to
Auto
.
Click the
Ethernet
Tab.
6
1
2
3
4
5
7-12
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
No. Setting
dress.
2 Node
Details
Set the network number of the Ethernet network to which the PT is connected. The number can be set between 1 and 127.
Set the node address of the PT in the Ethernet network. The address can be set between 1 and 254.
3 UDP Port No.
4 IP
IP Address
Sub-net
Mask
Default
Gateway
IP Proxy
Address
5 Conversion
Table
Set the UDP port number to be used. The number can be set between 1024 and
65535.
Set the IP address of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.
The IP address can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.
The subnet mask can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the IP router for communications with other networks.
The default gateway can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Set the IP address or IP proxy address of the transmission destination for Ethernet communications.
Set the address between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.
Create the conversion table converting FINS node addresses to IP addresses for
Ethernet communications. Up to 32 address combinations can be registered.
Procedure
•
Adding Settings
1. Click the
Add
Button to display the following dialog box.
6 LAN
2. Set the node address and the IP address to be converted to, and then click the
OK
Button. The setting range is as follows:
Node address: 1 to 253
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
•
Editing or Deleting Settings
Select the setting to be edited or deleted.
Click the
Edit
Button or the
Delete
Button.
Select the method for setting the Ethernet speed from
10/100BASE-T Auto Switch
or
10BASE-T Fixed
.
7-13
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Click the
Controller Link
Tab.
7-1 Settings
1
2
3
4
5
No. Setting Details
Set the network number of the Controller Link Network to which the PT is connected. The number can be set between 1 and 127.
4 Data Link Table
Setting
Set the node number of the PT on the Controller Link Network. The number can be set between 1 and 32.
Select the baud rate from 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.
Click the
Data Link Table Setting
Button to display the Data Link Table
Setting Dialog Box. .Refer to page 7-14 for details.
Set whether the Controller Link Status is read and set the address to which status is read. The address can be set to between $B0 and $B 32336.
Data Link tables show the way that data is linked. Data link tables can be set using Controller Link
Support Software or the CX-Net (Network Setting Tool). The data link tables can only be specified on the NS-Designer.
Click the
Data Link Table Setting
Button to display the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box.
1
2
7-14
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
7-1 Settings
Number Details
1 Display whether the Data Link Tables exist in the folder storing the project file.
Examples: No Data Link Tables:
2
Data Link Table exists:
Used to select the Data Link Table file. A file name with extension .cl3 must be set. Click the
Browse
Button and select the Data Link Table file. The specified Data Link Table will be resaved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.
Note
♦
Delete the data link tables from any node that is not participating in the data links.
Reference
•
Any file name can be set when creating data link tables using Controller Link Support Software or CX-Net. Specifying Data Link Tables in the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box on
NS-Designer. The file will be saved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.
•
Data link tables can be set via a network. Set data link tables in the Controller Link I/F Unit using CX-Net or Controller Link Support Software. Data Link Tables are not set in
NS-Designer. Setting data link tables via a network can be used to change data link tables.
•
When setting data link tables on the NS-Designer, the data link tables cannot be changed via network. If the user attempt to change the settings of data link tables using Controller Link
Support Software or CX-Net, the settings in NS-Designer will remain. For this reason, projects and setting files must be re-transferred to the PT when changing data link tables.
Status indicates the operating status (network status), such as error information in the Controller Link network and node participation status, and operating status (data link status). Reading the status makes it possible to check whether an error has occurred and whether the machine is operating correctly.
When any $B address within the range is set in the
Status Allocation Address
, the address will be the start address of 27 consecutive addresses to which status will be read. Refer to
the Operation Manual
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
for details on the allocation addresses.
7-15
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select the Printer Tab Page.
1
2
3
7-1 Settings
Number Setting
1 Printer Type
Details
Select either ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster as the printer’s control method.
2
3
Mode
Orientation
Select from the following:
•
•
•
Color
Monochrome
Monochrome (inverse)
Select to change the orientation of the paper.
•
•
Portrait
Landscape
7-16
Section 7 System Settings
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select the Video Tab Page.
7-1 Settings
1
2
3
4
Number Setting
1
2
Video Board
Color which fills blank channels
Details
Select the type of Video board to be installed in the PT. If this setting is changed, conversion processing will be executed for projects currently being edited.
Set when using an NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit. If the same color set in the video display color is set for graphics such as functional objects, the part overlapping the video display objects will be displayed as a video image and other parts will be displayed in black.
Color to fill the rectangle is set to the same color as the video display.
Graphic (rectangle)
Video display object The section that overlaps the video image is displayed as a transparent image. The section outside the boundary of the video image is displayed in black.
Graphic (rectangle)
3
4
Video Input Method
Save in a file if memory card is full
Select the input method for video signals. This setting is used for all video input from the video card.
Set the action to perform if the Memory Card is full when capturing video images using system memory.
Update: If the same file name exists, delete the oldest file and save the newer file.
Stop: The file will not be saved.
7-17
Section 8 Testing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes the test execution methods and test tool.
Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function
The test function is used to manipulate data created on screen in the NS-Designer to check screen data operation without transferring data to the PT.
Pressing buttons, changing addresses, and operating and displaying functional objects can be tested without the PT being used.
1. Save projects and screens before executing a test.
2. Select
Tools - Test
.
The Test Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Set the options for executing the test.
1
2
No. Setting
1 Minimize
NS-Designer
Details
Select to minimize the NS-Designer during test execution.
2 Start Test from
Current Screen
Select to start the test from the screen currently at the front of the NS-Designer.
When this setting is not selected, the test will start from the Initial Screen setting in the Initial Tab Page located under Settings - System Setting.
4. Click the
Start
Button to start up the test function and start the test.
Reference
♦
If projects and screens are not saved before a test is executed, a dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to save data when
Tools - Test
is selected. Save data before executing a test.
The test screen and test tool is started up when a test is executed. The test screen is first displayed with the set screen size.
Test screen
Test tool
8-1
Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function
Switching Screen Display and Style
By double-clicking a position on the test screen where no function is located, the screen display and style can be switched using the following procedure. The settings can also be switched from the
View Menu.
Show title bar, hide menu bar
Hide title bar, hide menu bar
Full screen display
Hide title bar, show menu bar
Show title bar, show menu bar
Selecting a Screen
Select
File - Select page
, and display the required screen by selecting it from the Select Page
Dialog Box.
Function List
The functions in each menu of the test screen are as follows:
File Menu
Menu item
Select Project
Select Screen
Exit
Select the project to be tested.
Select the screen to be displayed.
Exit the test.
Function
View Menu
Menu item
Title
Menu
Full Screen
Function
Select whether to display or hide the test screen title bar.
Select whether to display or hide the test screen menu bar.
Switch the test screen to full screen display mode.
Option Menu
Menu item Function
Input mode
Caption mode
Select the input mode for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input from keypad or external device (such as keyboard).
While external device is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check mark.
Select whether to display labels or show addresses.
(This function is the same as that selected under the NS-Designer
View - Show
Address
.)
While
Show Address
is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check mark.
About product information Displays information on the product.
Reference
♦
Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.
Ends the test screen and test tool.
1. Use one of the following operations to end the test.
•
Select
File - Exit
.
•
Click the Button at the top right of the window.
•
Double-click the test mode icon at the top left of the window.
8-2
Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function
•
Click the test mode icon at the top left of the window, and select
Close
from the Control Menu
Box that is displayed.
•
Press the Alt + F4 Keys.
2. A dialog box confirming whether to exit the test will be displayed. Click the
Yes
Button to exit the test.
Reference
♦
When the menu bar is not displayed in the test screen, double-click on the test screen until the menu bar is displayed.
The following restrictions apply to testing. The tests operate differently from PT operations.
1 Changing Date and Time
Date and time settings cannot be changed when using the test function, even if a new date or time is input using the date and time functional objects.
2. Flicker Display Color
When flicker is performed in test mode, the inverse display color may differ from the color displayed at the PT.
3. $SB and $SW Operations
In test mode, operations can be checked for the following system memory bits and words only.
When checking operations, change the $SB and $SW values directly.
Changes to other system memory values will not be processed.
Offset
+19
+33
+36
+38
+39
+40
+41
+45
+46
+47
+52
$SB
Details
Prohibit Input
Save Alarm/Event History
Save Data Log
Save Operation Log
Log Functional Object Operation
Log Switch Screen Operation
Log Macro Operation
Macro Error Dialog Control
Notification of Macro Error
Logging Process Error Flag
Data Block Operation Complete Flag
+8
+9
+10
+13
+18
+19
+20
+21
+23
+24
+25
+26
Offset
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
$SW
Details
Current Screen No.
Current Pop-up Screen 1 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (Y)
Current Pop-up Screen 2 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (Y)
Current Pop-up Screen 3 No.
Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (X)
Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (Y)
Current Label No.
Password No. for Canceling Input Prohibition
No. of Alarms/Events Occurred
Occurred Alarm/Event ID
Cancelled Alarm/Event ID
Alarm/Event ID of Alarm/Event Object Macro
Macro Error No.
Screen Number Having Macro Error
Object ID Having Macro Error
Macro Timing Having Error
8-3
Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function
Offset
$SB
Details Offset
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
$SW
Details
Offset Value for Index 10
Offset Value for Index 11
Offset Value for Index 12
Offset Value for Index 13
Offset Value for Index 14
Offset Value for Index 15
Offset Value for Index 16
Offset Value for Index 17
Offset Value for Index 18
Offset Value for Index 19
Data Log Group Number
Data Block Error Number
4. $SB and $SW Address Allocations
Communications are not performed between allocated addresses and $SB or $SW.
For example, when communications are set between $SW0 and DM 00000:
•
Even if the value of $SW0 is changed, DM 00000 will not change.
•
Even if the value of DM 00000 is changed, $SW0 will not change.
The format of the following input dialogs is different from that used by the PT.
•
Each type of keypad displayed when inputting Numeral Display & Input.
•
Each type of keypad displayed when inputting String Display & Input.
•
Date Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting date settings.
•
Time Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting time settings.
•
Password Input Dialog Boxes and virtual keyboards that are displayed when inputting passwords.
Also, the PT can display two types of keypads (with and without a temporary input), but in test mode only the keypads without a temporary input can be displayed.
6. Video Display Object
Video images are not displayed in test mode. The display area for a video display will be gray-out instead. The display will also be different if other objects overlap the video display object or a dialog box is displayed.
•
PT: The video display object will be displayed on top and any objects overlapping it will not be displayed. The video display object will disappear temporarily if an error dialog box, write confirmation box, etc., is displayed. The video image will return when the dialog box is closed.
•
Test mode: Function objects are display on top of the video display object.
7. Command Buttons
The following command button functions will not work in test mode.
•
Video controls - Video capture
•
Video controls - Contrast adjustment
•
Video controls - Vision Sensor Console output
Pop-up menus for word buttons, command buttons, and text display and input objects will be different from those on the PT.
•
PT: A scroll bar will appear on the right of the menu when there are more than 10 items on the menu.
•
Test mode: All menu items will be displayed at the same time even if there are more than 10 items.
8-4
Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function
9. Log Data File for Data Log
In test mode, only one log data file will be saved for each group. On the PT, up to 999 log data files will be saved for each group. If, however, the output file name that is set is 6 characters or longer, only up to 99 log data files will be saved. The log data file names are as shown in the following table.
PT/Test mode Log data file names Details
PT Trd#
∗
.CSV (default) # : 00 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.
∗
: 001 to 999. The largest current number will be incremented by 1 to when the data is saved.
Test mode Trd#.CSV (default) # : 0 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.
10. Reading/Writing Data Block Data Files
Reading and writing data block files is different.
•
PT: The read/write location for data files can be set to either the PT or the Memory Card
(only when display a confirmation dialog box is set).
•
Test mode: The read/write location for data files cannot be set and the operation is performed directly on the CSV data file set for the
Register Data Block
. To test writing a data file, make a CSV data file backup in advance to transfer to the PT.
Refer to
2-16 Data Blocks
in the
Programming Manual
for details.
11. Displaying Data Block Table Data
Operation is different when editing data block tables.
•
PT: Even if values are edited in the data block table, the previous values will be displayed after the screen is switched unless the data file is written.
•
Test mode: Values edited in the data block table will be displayed after the screen is switched even if the data file is not written. The data file must be read to return to the previous values.
Refer to
2-16 Data Blocks
in the
Programming Manual
for details.
12. System Language
The system language cannot be changed in test mode. The language set for the OS of the computer will be displayed.
8-5
Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool
The test tool is used to display a list of addresses set in the functional objects, and to change address values and monitor address status without actual communications being performed with external devices.
Executes each menu bar test tool function.
Displays the current address values.
The addresses set for the functional objects of the currently displayed screen are displayed in sorted order. For each new screen displayed, the addresses set for the functional objects of the screen are added to the display.
The test tool can be used to switch the display as follows:
The display format of addresses can be selected from the following five settings.
•
Decimal (signed)
•
Octal
•
Decimal (unsigned)
•
Binary
•
Hexadecimal
Procedure
•
•
Select the display format from
View - Display
.
Select the format from the Display Format Combo Box.
Select the address displayed in the test tool from the following 3 options.
•
•
•
Bit device (bit addresses only)
Word device (word addresses only)
All (all addresses set in the functional object)
Procedure
•
•
Select the display contents from
View - Contents
.
Select the display contents from the Contents Combo Box.
Reference
♦
The display format and contents can also be switched from the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.
8-6
Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool
Use the following procedure with the test tool to change address values set in functional objects.
Select the address to be changed and double-click on it or click the
Set Value
Button.
Double-click the selected item or click the
Set Value
Button.
The Set Value Dialog Box will be displayed.
Bit Addresses
Click the
SET
Button to write 1 to the address.
Click the
RESET
Button to write 0 to the address.
Word Addresses
Input the value to be written and then click the
OK
Button.
The symbol will change to for the address that has had a value changed.
Reference
♦
Set
Display
to
Hexadecimal
to input BCD formats.
Example:
To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input F012.
If
Display
is not set to
Hexadecimal
, input the value converted to the required display format.
Example:
To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input the converted value –4,078 in INT.
Refer to
2-8 Common Functional Object Functions
in the
NS Series Programming Manual
for details on storage formats.
♦
The values can also be set from the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.
8-7
Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool
Always on Top
The setting for whether to display the test tool on top can be switched under
Options
-
Always on Top
.
While the setting for displaying the test tool on top is selected, the menu item will be displayed with a check mark.
Reference
♦
The default setting is for the test tool to be always displayed on top.
8-8
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section explains the functions used for checking that screen data is correct and displaying a list of errors, based on the validation settings.
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Select
Tools - Validation
.
2. The Validation Dialog Box will be displayed.
Set each item and then click the
OK
Button.
1
9-1 Validation Settings
2
No. Setting
1 Check When
After pressing OK button
Select the range for executing the validation from either the front screen page only or the whole project.
Details
Set the range and timing for executing validation.
Click the
OK
Button in the Validation Dialog Box to execute the validation.
Before saving screens
Open error screen after validation
2 Check
When saving a screen, validation is executed before the screen is saved. Validation is executed for the front screen only.
Select this setting to display detected errors after the validation has been completed.
Select the items to be checked for errors.
Refer to
9-3 List of Validation Items
for details.
Reference
♦
Even if the
Detect incorrect address
item is selected and
Current Screen
is selected for the range, addresses for the following items will not be checked. If
Whole Project
is selected for the range and the
Detect Incorrect Address
item is executed,
Jump
cannot be performed from the validation result to the following addresses.
Flicker settings; Data log settings; System settings; Alarm/event settings; Data block settings; Project Properties - Macro; Screen Properties - Macro
9-1
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
•
When Validation Is Performed with
After pressing OK button
Selected:
The following dialog box will be displayed after executing validation.
9-2 Validation Results
•
When Validation Is Performed with
Before saving screens
Selected:
The screen will be saved after executing validation. A dialog box is not displayed when this method is used.
The Validation Result Dialog Box is displayed after executing validation.
Displays information for objects that were detected with errors.
Executes validation again and displays the most recent data.
Select the error from the validation results and click the
Jump
Button, or double-click on the selected line. The corresponding object or screen will be displayed. When the error occurred in an object, boxes
( g
) will flash.
Select and click the
Jump
Button or double-click on the selected line.
The black squares will flash.
9-2
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9-2 Validation Results
Reference
♦
The Validation Result Dialog Box will remain open until the
Close
Button or the Close Button ( at the top right of the dialog box is clicked.
The Validation Result Dialog Box can be reopened after closing by selecting
Tools - Validation
Result
or clicking the
Validation Result
Button.
Toolbar
)
9-3
Section 9 Validation
NS-Designer Operation Manual
9-3 List of Validation Items
Error No. Item
1
2
3
Detect incorrect addresses
Detect unset addresses
Check if a screen switch object exists on each screen
Details
Checks whether the address formats are incorrect or whether the addresses are set outside the specified range. Alarm/event, data log, data block, and system memory allocation addresses, however, are not checked.
Searches for functional objects and frames that have not been allocated addresses.
Checks whether screen switch objects operated by Command Buttons exist on each screen.
5
6
8
Check if screen switch destination exists
Check if specified files
(bmp/txt etc.) exist
Checks whether the screen switch destination specified by the screen switch command button exists.
Checks whether files (BMP files, JPEG files, TXT files, or LST files) set in functional objects exist in the screen folder. The screen folder is a folder located one level below the project file. The folder is automatically created with the same name as the project.
Checks whether the positions of functional objects are overlapping.
9
10
Detect overlapping functional objects
Check if functional objects are created inside screen/frame area
Check if touch points are included in functional objects
Checks whether objects are positioned in areas that are not displayed when the PT is running, or whether the objects in frames are positioned outside the frame area.
Checks whether the functional objects are positioned above the touch points. When used to check pop-up screens, this setting is used to detect functional objects that have a width or height that is smaller than the mesh size of the touch panel. The touch panel mesh size is
16
×
16 dots for NS12, NS10, and NS5, and 20
×
20 dots for NS8.
9-4
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section explains how to transfer screen data that has been created or edited to and from the PT, and how to retrieve registered data from the PT.
Note: Do not perform the following operations while downloading or uploading project data or the system program. The data may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Press the PT reset switch.
If project data or the system program is damaged by turning OFF the power when writing files, it may not be possible to replace the system program using a normal data transfer. If project data is damaged, format the screen data areas using the system menu of the PT. Refer to
6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format
in the
NS
Series Setup Manual
for details on formatting screen data areas. Refer to
3-6-3 Transferring Data with
Memory Cards – Errors
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
to replace the System Program.
Do not download a system program earlier than version 6.2 to an NS5-V2 PT. Refer to
3-6-3Transferring
Data with Memory Cards – Errors
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for information on updating and recovering the system program.
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
There are two methods for transferring data between a PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer):
•
Transferring data to the PT
•
Transferring data to a Memory Card inserted into the PT.
These methods can be used in the following cases.
Transferring data to the PT
Transferring data to a Memory Card inserted into the PT.
•
•
•
•
•
Installing the System in the PT.
Transferring a project, screen data, and setting file to the PT.
Transferring the project data stored in the PT to the personal computer.
Transferring data to a Memory Card.
Transferring the data stored in the memory card (data logs, alarm histories, data blocks, etc.) to the personal computer.
•
•
Deleting files stored on the Memory Card.
Creating/Deleting folders.
Memory Card
Download
Upload
Transferring data using a Memory
Card inserted into the computer running NS-Designer and the PT.
•
Files
•
Creating folders remotely
•
System
•
Project
•
Screens
•
Setting files
•
Alarm histories
•
Data logs
•
Data blocks
•
Operation log
•
Captured data
PT
Data transfer between computer (NS-Designer) and PT.
•
System
•
Projects
This section describes transferring data to the PT. Refer to
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Mem-
ory Card
to transfer data to a Memory Card.
10-1
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
The preparations and procedures for downloading data created on the NS-Designer to the PT, and uploading data from the PT to the NS-Designer are described below. To transfer the data between the
PT and NS-Designer (personal computer), select the method of transfer and make settings to transfer the data beforehand.
■
Six communications methods can be used to transfer data between the PT and NS-Designer, as shown in the following table. Select the appropriate method depending on the distance between the PT and NS-Designer, or the features of each transfer method.
Communications method
Serial cable
PT model
All models
Required devices
Exclusive cable
Features
Transfers screen data by connecting cable between the PT and personal computer. The length of the cable is 2 m, so the distance between personal computer and PT is limited.
Ethernet is faster than using serial cable and can cover greater distances. In addition, screen data can be transferred via a network.
Ethernet NS12-TS01-V1 Twisted-pair
NS10-TV01-V1 cable
NS8-TV01-V1
NS8-TV11-V1
NS5-SQ01-V1
NS5-SQ01-V2
NS5-TQ01-V2
NS5-MQ01-V2
Modem
Controller
Link
USB
All models
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS01-V1
NS10-TV00-V1
NS10-TV01-V1
All models (See note.)
Special cable for analog modem
Controller Link
Support
Board, Controller Link
Interface Unit, twisted-pair cable
USB cable
Remote data transfers are possible via phone lines using a modem.
Data transfers can be performed to PT connected to a
Controller Link network via a Controller Link Support
Board mounted in a computer.
Memory Card All models Memory Card interface on the personal computer
Connecting the personal computer and PT with a USB cable enables faster screen transfer than serial connections.
First, store the data from the NS-Designer in a Memory Card. Then, transfer the data from the Memory
Card to the PT. Refer to
3-6 Using Memory Card
s in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for details on transferring data using a Memory Card.
Note: Support varies for the NS-V1 Series PTs and the PT system program version. Refer to
3-3-2 Connecting via USB
in the
Setup Manual.
10-2
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
■
To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect the RS-232C port on the computer to the tool connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to
2-2 Part Names and Functions
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for the location of PT connectors. Refer to
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for details on preparing the cable.
Transfer method
Serial Cable Connection
Recommended cable
Model: XW2Z-S002 (2 m long) manufactured by OMRON
(D-Sub 9-pin Male
↔
D-Sub 9-pin Female)
Reference
♦
Log in as the administrator when transferring data via a serial connection using NS-Designer Ver.
5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.
To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect an Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to
2-2 Part Names and Functions
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for the location of PT connectors. Refer to
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for details on preparing the cable.
Transfer method
Ethernet Connection
Recommended cable
Twisted-pair straight or crossed cable (10/100Base-T)
Reference
♦
Log in as the administrator when transferring data via an Ethernet connection using NS-Designer
Ver. 5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.
The first time data is transferred to the PT via Ethernet, it is necessary to set the network address, node address, and IP address beforehand. Make the following settings on the
System Menu –
Comm.
Tab Page.
Item Setting
Network Address Set the Ethernet network address.
Node Address Ensure that the PC and PT settings are not the same.
IP Address Set the same network ID (the underlined parts in the example below) and set the node address as the host ID (the last part of the IP address).
Setting Example
Network address: 1
Ethernet
Twisted-pair cross cable
NS-Designer
Node address: 1
IP address: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
PT
Node address: 2
IP address: 192.168.1.2
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
10-3
Section 10 Transferring Data 10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Refer to
6-6-4 Setting Ethernet
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for details on making settings, such as the IP Address, at the PT.
Reference
♦
With NS-Designer Ver. 2.X and earlier versions, data must be transferred via serial cable or Memory Card before transferring data via Ethernet. This is not necessary with Ver. 3.X or later versions.
10-4
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
To transfer data, connect the PT and the computer running NS-Designer via cables and modems. Refer to the operation manual for the modem for modem settings.
Make the following settings when connecting the computer to a modem and transferring data over telephone lines to a PT connected via a modem.
The baud rate must be set before transferring screen data to a PT connected via modems. Set the serial port to be used to a modem connection on the
System Menu – Comm.
Tab Page, click the
Details
Button and set the following items.
Baud rate
Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
Item Setting
Set the baud rate between the modem and PT to 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200.
The number of data bits (length) is always 8 bits.
The number of stop bits (length) is always 1 bit.
The parity bit setting is always
None
.
Serial Phone line Serial
Modem Modem
PT
NS-Designer
Reference
♦
When using a project created with system version 5.X or lower, select
Settings - Conversion -
Project -to Ver. 6.0
from the NS-Designer and convert to system project version 6 before making the settings.
10-5
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
After completing the modem settings, connect the PT to the modem. Use the following connection diagram as reference and connect the PT to the modem.
D-sub 25-pin connector (male)
D-sub 9-pin connector (male)
Modem
PT
Connector hood (FG)
FG
1
Shield
Connector hood (FG)
1
FG
SD
RD
RS
2
3
4
2
3
4
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
5 5
9
CS
SG
DR
7
6 7
DR
ER
20 8
ER
The following hardware is required to transfer data via Controller Link.
PT
Computer
Name Model
Computer Link Interface Unit
(See note 1.)
NS-CLK21
3G8F5-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for
ISA Bus (See note 2.)
Controller Link Support Board
(See note 3.)
3G8F7-CLK21
Twisted-pair Cable ESVC0.5X2C to in the
NS Series Setup Manual
(Cat. No. V083) for information on mounting and wiring the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit.
2. Refer to the
Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual
(Cat. No. W307) for information on mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for ISA Bus.
3. Refer to the
Controller Link Support Boards for PCI Bus Operation Manual
(Cat. No. W383) for information on mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus.
PT Settings
The following settings must be made from the NS-Designer before transferring screen data to a PT connected via Controller Link. After the settings have been made, they are transferred to the PT along with any screen data without using the Controller Link.
1. Select
– System Settings – Comm – All
from the NS-Designer.
2. Set to
Use.
the Tab and make the following settings. Set the network address of the
Controller Link to which the PT is connected. The setting range is from 1 to 127.
4. Set the node address to the node address of the PT in the Controller Link network. The setting range is from 1 to 32.
5. Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps. the Button.
10-6
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
7. Transfer the settings along with any screen data from the personal computer to the PT without going through the Controller Link network.
Data can be transferred by connecting the PT and the computer running the NS-Designer with a USB cable. The USB port on the computer is connected to the USB slave connector on the PT. Refer to
2-2
Part Names and Functions
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for the location of the connector on the PT.
Reference
♦
To transfer via USB, the USB driver for data transfer to the PT must be installed in the computer. Refer to
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
for the installation procedure.
♦
For an NS-V1 Series PT, confirm that the lot number of the PT supports USB transfer and that the system software version installed in the PT supports USB transfer. Refer to
3-3-2 Connecting via USB
in the
Setup Manual
for details.
Data can be saved on a Memory Card from the NS-Designer on the computer and then transferred to the PT from the Memory Card. The Memory Card is inserted into the memory card connector on the PT.
Refer to
3-6 Using Memory Cards
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for details on transferring data using a Memory Card. Refer to
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for information on the Memory Cards and Memory Card Adapters that can be used.
■
The following data can be transferred.
Projects Project data
Screen data
System program
All project data, consisting of screen data and setting file.
Screen data only. Does not contain setting file.
A system program is necessary to operate the PT using communications or to change font sizes. It is only used for special occasions, such as replacing the current system program or recovering system operation.
OK
OK
OK
NO
OK OK
Reference
♦
If the version of system program in the PT older than the version of the screen data, project data, screen data, and setting files cannot be transferred. Refer to
Appendix 9 Converting Data between
Different Versions of NS-series Products
.
♦
Perform PT system recovery if the system in the PT becomes corrupted or needs to be updated.
Refer to
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards
−
Errors
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for system recovery and update procedures.
10-7
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
■
To transfer data to PT, follow the steps given below.
Start transfer program.
Refer to the following sections
•
Project data:
10-1-3 Transferring Project Data
•
Screen data:
10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data
OLE_LINK2
System program: Refer to
10-1-5 Transferring the System Program
.
Set communications.
Refer to
10-1-2
Communications Settings for
NS-Designer
Select the project.
Entire project
Screen data
Set communications.
Refer to
10-1-2
Communications Settings for
NS-Designer
Select the system program.
Execute transfer.
Restart PT.
10-8
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
■
Use the following procedure to transfer data to the PT. In this section, only an outline of the procedure is provided. The actual step may differ depending on the type of data being transferred. For details, refer to
10-1-3 Transferring Project Data, 10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data,
and
Transferring the
System Program
.
1. Click and select
Transfer Data
, or click the Windows Start Button and select
Programs
-OMRON - NS-Designer - Screen Data Transfer
.
The Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
1
4
5
2
3
No. Item
1. Select All
Contents
Specifies all screen data and the setting file stored in a project.
3.
Update Clicking this button will automatically select the screen data with different modification
Screen dates between the computer and PT or Memory Card. It is convenient to repeatedly edit and transfer screen data. If this button is not pressed, the updated screen will not be selected.
List Boxes for
NS-Designer and
NS-Series/ Memory Card
The screen numbers, screen names, and modification dates are displayed. The icons displayed on the left have the following meanings.
Icon Meaning
Indicates new screen data.
Indicates modified screen data.
Indicates old screen data.
None Indicates data that is the same between the computer and PT.
4
5
Connect
Cancel
Click this button to connect the computer and PT.
Click this button to disconnect the computer and PT.
10-9
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
1. Select
Select Project
from the
Mode
Menu on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Click the
Select Project
Button, and then select a project. (This step is necessary only to send a
specific project. The default selection is the project data that is currently being created. Usually it is
not necessary to select a project.)
3. Select the communications method. For details, refer to
10-1-2 Communications Settings for
NS-Designer
.
4. Click the
Connect
Button. The computer and PT will be connected.
Computer PT
5. The screen data stored in selected project is displayed in both list boxes.
Select the items (whole project/screen/setting file) that you want to transfer to the PT.
Computer PT
6. Click the Button to transfer data from the computer to the PT or a Memory Card.
Click the Button to transfer data from the PT or Memory Card to the computer.
10-10
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
When uploading, a dialog box will be displayed to specify where the project should be saved. For details, refer to
10-1-3 Transferring Project Data
.
7. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the
Start
Button to start the transfer.
8. If any of the following items differ between the source and destination, a warning message will be displayed.
•
PT Model
•
System Version
•
Language
Messages will show information about the source and destination.
Click the
Yes
Button to continue with the transfer.
9. When transferring data to a Memory Card is finished, a message that the upload/download has been completed will be displayed. Refer to
3-6 Using Memory Cards
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for the procedure to transfer data from a Memory Card to the PT.
If data transfer is performed via a serial cable, modems, Ethernet, or Controller Link, the following screen will be displayed on the PT while transferring the data.
Screen Display on PT
Progress displayed.
Transfer File Name
Reference
♦
The maximum file size for transferring is 1.44 Mbytes.
If you attempt to transfer data exceeded 1.44 Mbytes, the following message will be displayed and data transfer will be aborted.
Check the size of files such as BMP files, and after changing or deleting data, execute the transfer again.
10-11
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
10. When the data transfer has been completed, a screen indicating so will be displayed on the PT and a confirmation dialog box for restarting the PT will be displayed on the computer. If
Auto-reset after the transmission
is selected in the Comms Method Dialog Box, the PT will be automatically reset without displaying the confirmation dialog box.
Screen Display on PT
11. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT.
If you click the
No
Button, the screen will return to Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and data can be transferred again.
Even if you click the
No
Button, a confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will be displayed again when you exit the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. If the
Cancel
Button is clicked, the window will return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
10-12
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Screen Display on PT
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
The transferred screen is displayed.
Reference
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
10-13
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Use the following procedure to set the communication methods between the NS-Designer and PT.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. the Button.
The Comms. Method Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
3
4
No. Setting
1 Comms.
Method
2 Set
Details
Select the method of communications with the PT: Ethernet, Serial, Memory Card,
Serial (Modem), USB, or CLK (Controller Link).
Make settings for the communications method selected in 1, above. Refer to the setting procedure given for each method later in this section.
3 Drive
4 Bank
When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, specify the drive where the Memory Card is inserted.
When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, select the bank to be used. A bank refers to a collection of system files and screen data. Banks 1 to 4 can be stored in a Memory Card.
5 Auto-reset after the transmission
Set whether the PT is to be automatically reset when a transfer is completed for
Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Controller Link, or USB communications. the Button. The dialog box will be closed and the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return. the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After the connection is established, the PT will automatically switch to the following window and go into transfer-wait state.
10-14
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Reference
♦
Check the following items if the connection is not established.
•
•
Are the cables connected properly?
Is the PT turned ON? Is the startup message that is displayed directly after turning ON the power displayed?
Note
♦
When transferring data using Ethernet or Controller Link, data can be sent to other nodes on the network unintentionally, so always select the node carefully.
■
1
2
1
No. Setting
Port ing Time
Details
Select the COM port on the computer to use to communicate with the PT.
Set the response monitoring time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.
10-15
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Make the following settings on the
Network
Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
5
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
2
3
4
Address
FINS Destination
Address
Frame Length out
Network
Node
-
Details
Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the computer is connected.
Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the PT is connected.
Set the node address of the PT.
Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.
2. Make the following settings on the
Driver
Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
1
No.
2
3
4
Field
Workstation
Node Number
-
Item
IP Address
Port Number
-
-
Auto-detect
Details
The workstation node number can be input if the
Auto-detect
option is not selected. If automatic detection is not used, the node and IP address must be input on the conversion table on the Ethernet Tab Page in the
System Settings.
Select this option to automatically generate the node address of the computer from the IP address. If automatic detection is used, the node and IP address do not need to be input on the conversion table on the Ethernet Tab Page in the
System Settings.
Example: If the IP address of the computer is 192.168.0.10, the node address of the computer will be automatically set to 10.
Set the IP address of the PT to be connected.
Set the UDP port number. Normally 9600 can be used.
10-16
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Make the following settings on the
Network
Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
1
No.
2
3
Field
FINS Destination Address
Frame length
Timeout
Item
Network
Node
-
Details
Set the network address of the Controller Link network to which the PT is connected.
Set the node address of the PT.
Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.
2. Make the following settings on the
Driver
Tab Page.
5
6
4
1
2
3
1
No.
NSB
Field
2
3
4
5
6
Board Type
Network Address
Item
Shared RAM
Address
Interrupt Level
Baud Rate
-
Node
Unit
Details
Set to the same value as the DIP switch on the Controller Link
Support Board.
Set to the same value as the jumper pins on the Controller Link
Support Board.
Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.
Set the Controller Link Support Board type to
ISA
for an ISA
Board or to
PCI
for a PCI Board.
Set the local node address of the Controller Link Support Board.
Set the unit number of the Controller Link Support Board between 16 and 31.
10-17
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
1. Make the following settings on the
Network
Tab Page.
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
1
No. Field
timeout
Item Details
Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.
2. Make the following settings on the
Modem
Tab Page.
The settings on the Driver Tab Page do not need to be made if the following settings are made on the Modem Tab Page.
1
2
3
4
5
No. Field Item
1 Modem -
Details
Select the modem driver. Click the
Configure
Button to display the Modem Property Dialog Box.
Set the location of the local modem. 2 Current - tion
3 Connect To Country Code
4
5
Area Code
Telephone
Number
Set the country code of the destination modem, even when communicating within the same country.
Set the area code of the destination modem, even when communicating within the same area.
Set the phone number of the modem to which to connect.
10-18
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
3. Click the Button on the
Modem Tab
Page and set the modem properties.
Setting Example
Set the following items on the
General
Tab Page.
1
2
1
2
No. Field on General Tab Page
Data connection options
Item Details
Port speed
Flow control
Set the baud rate of the modem.
This item enables or disables flow control. Disable flow control.
Make the following settings on the
Advanced
Tab Page.
1
2
3
1
2
3
No. Field on Details Tab Page
Hardware settings
Item Details
Data bits
Parity
Stop bits
Set the data length to 8 bits.
Set the parity to “none.”
Set 1 stop bit.
Reference
♦
If the option to Auto-reset after the transmission is selected, the PT will be automatically reset and the phone line will be disconnected after transfer has been completed.
10-19
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
No. Setting
1 Response monitoring time
Details
The monitoring time for receiving a response.
Increase this time only if there are excessive communications errors.
Use the following procedure to transfer all data for a selected project to the PT or a Memory Card.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Select from the
Mode
Menu or right-click on the Transfer Data Dialog Box and select
Select Project
from the pull-down menu. the Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project data currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)
Reference
♦
When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently saved data will be transferred and unsaved editing will be lost from the transfer data. the Button and set the communications method. Refer to
nications Settings for NS-Designer
for details. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
6. Click at the top of the
NS-Designer
Box. All the screens stored in the project will be selected.
10-20
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
7. Click the Button to display the confirmation dialog box and then click the
Start
Button to start downloading the data. When using a Memory Card to transfer data, this will complete the transfer process. Steps 8 and 9 are not required.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT.
If the wrong project data has been transferred, the procedure can be executed again from step 2 without restarting the PT by clicking the
No
Button. if
No
Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the
Cancel
Button is clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.
Reference
♦
When data is transferred, any of the following history data that was previously recorded in the PT will be deleted.
- Alarm History
- Data Log
- Operation Log
- Error Log
- Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active
Parts.
♦
Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog
Box:
Sheet 0
Sheet 1
4095
4094
Sheet 5
Sheet 6
4090
4089
Sheet 2
Sheet 3
Sheet 4
4093
4092
4091
Sheet 7
Sheet 8
Sheet 9
4088
4087
4086
Use the following procedure to transfer data stored in the PT or on a Memory Card to the NS-Designer.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Select
Select Project
from the
Mode
Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select
Select Project
from the pop-up menu.
10-21
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
3. Click the
Comms. Method
Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to
Communications Settings for NS-Designer
. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
5. Click the Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the project name under which to save the uploading data, and click the
Save
Button.
6. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button. Uploading will start.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
7. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT. Click the
No
Button to continue downloading data. if
No
Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the
Cancel
Button is clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.
10-22
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Reference
When uploading data, only the whole project can be transferred. Transferring separate screens is not possible.
The contents of system setting on the NS-Designer cannot be uploaded.
Individual screen data stored in the selected project can be transferred to PT or Memory Card.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box
2. Select
Select Project
from the
Mode
Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select
Select Project
from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the
Select Project
Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)
Reference
♦
When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently saved data will be transferred and any unsaved changes will be lost in the transfer data.
4. Click the
Comms. Method
Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to
Communications Settings for NS-Designer
. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
6. Select the screen data to transfer from the list box for the NS-Designer. Click the
Select Update
Screen
Button to automatically select only screen data with different modification dates between the computer and PT or Memory Card.
10-23
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Display screens with different dates.
7. Click the Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
8. Click the
Start
Button. The download will be started.
Reference
♦
When you select
File - Save All
on the NS-Designer, the modification dates for all screens will be changed. Therefore, if the
Select Updated Screen
Button is clicked, all screens will be selected, not just updated screens.
♦
When choosing multiple screens at the same time, select screens while pressing the Ctrl Key. To select a range of screens, select the screens while pressing
The Shift Key. To cancel selection, click the screens again while pressing the
Ctrl Key.
♦
When transferring the data, the following data will be deleted.
-
-
-
-
-
Alarm History
Data Log
Operation Log
Error Log
Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active Parts.
♦
If the project name read by the data transfer program and the project name stored in the PT are the same, only screen data will be transferred even if the contents of the two projects are different. Always confirm data contents when transferring only screen data.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
9. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT.
Click the
No
Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.
10-24
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Even if the
No
Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel
Button.
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
♦
Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog
Box:
Sheet 0 4095 Sheet 5 4090
Sheet 1
Sheet 2
Sheet 3
Sheet 4
4094
4093
4092
4091
Sheet 6
Sheet 7
Sheet 8
Sheet 9
4089
4088
4087
4086
A system program is necessary to operate PT for communications or to change font sizes. It is only used for special occasion, such as replacing the system program or recovering system operation.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Select
Select System
from the
Mode
Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select
Select System
from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the
Select System
Button and select the folder named
bank1
. The folder named
bank1
is in the
System Backup – NS12_V1/NS10_V1/NS8_V1/NS5_V1_V2 – V6_2 folder
under the
NS-Designer installation folder. Refer to
2-2 Installing the NS-Designer
for details on directories. the Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to
Communications Settings for NS-Designer
. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
10-25
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
6. Click the Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
7. Click the
Start
Button. The download will be started.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT. the Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.
Even if the
No
Button is clicked, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel
Button.
10-26
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
If the system program is transferred to the PT, the screen data in the PT will not be deleted. When transferring the system program, match the version of system program and project data before operating the PT.
If the PT system is destroyed or requires updating, perform the PT system recovery operation. Refer to
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards
in the
NS Series Setup Manual
for the procedures to recovery and updating.
Use the following procedure to transfer the data stored in the PT or Memory Card to the NS-Designer.
1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
2. Select from the
Mode
Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select
Select System
from the pop-up menu. the Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to
Communications Settings for NS-Designer
. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.
5. Click the Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed.
6. Specify the project name under which to save the data, and click the
Save
Button.
7. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button. The upload will be started.
The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
8. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the
Yes
Button to restart the PT. Click the
No
Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.
10-27
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-1 Transferring Data to the PT
Even if the
No
Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the
Yes
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
No
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
CANCEL
Button.
♦
If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.
10-28
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
This section explains preparations and procedures to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted into PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer).
To transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the NS-Designer, select the transfer method, and make the settings beforehand.
There are five methods to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in PT and the NS-Designer:
•
•
•
•
•
Serial cable
Ethernet
Modems
Controller Link
USB
Connect the PT and NS-Designer (personal computer) using either of these methods and transfer the data. Refer to
Preparations and Procedures before Connecting
for the features of these methods and the required cables.
To transfer data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer (personal computer) using serial, modem, Ethernet, Controller Link, or USB communications, settings on the PT are required. Refer to
10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting
and make settings for FinsGateway.
Transfer Methods
The following operations can be performed between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.
Memory Card
→
NS-Designer Transferring files stored in a Memory Card.
NS-Designer
→
Memory Card Transferring files stored in the computer.
Deleting files stored in a Memory Card
Creating folders in a Memory Card
Deleting folders in a Memory Card
10-29
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
Use the following steps to transfer the data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.
Start Memory Card transfer.
Set communications.
Transfer data.
NS-Designer → Memory Card in the PT
Memory Card in the PT
→
NS-Designer (Computer)
10-30
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
Use the following procedure to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the
NS-Designer (personal computer).
1. Click the Windows
Start
Button and select
Programs - OMRON – CX-One - NS-Designer -
Memory Card Transfer
.
2. The Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box will be displayed.
5
6
1
2
3
4
7
Number Item
1
2
Connect Button
Cancel Button
Contents
Connects the computer to the PT.
Disconnects the computer from the PT.
3
4
Comms.Method Button Displays the Comms Method Dialog Box.
Displays the next-higher folder.
Deletes the files selected in the File List.
If the selected folder is empty, the folder will be deleted. If the selected folder is not empty, an error message will appear and the folder will not be deleted.
Creates a new folder.
5
6
7
Look in:
File List
Displays where the file is placed.
“/” indicates the root folder in the Memory Card.
Displays the files and folders that are in the folder as a list.
Selecting, transferring, and deleting the files or folders can be performed.
Downloads the selected files or folders from the file list of NS-Designer to the
Memory Card inserted in PT.
Uploads the selected files or folders from the file list of the Memory Card to the computer.
10-31
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card
Reference
♦
The following action on the PT may be delayed while transferring the data using the Memory card.
- Key press actions
- Updating number values and character strings
- Time for displaying a screen
3. Click the
Comm. Method
Button to select communications method.
(1)
Number Item Contents
Selects the communications method to Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Controller Link, or USB.
4. Set the communications method and then click the
OK
Button. the Button on the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box.
When the connection has been made, the file list will be displayed for the Memory Card.
Reference
♦
If the connection is not completed, an error message will be displayed. Click the
Connect
Button again after checking the following items.
- Communications Method
- Node Address
- Cable Connection
6. Select the files or folders from the file list in the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box to execute the transfer, deletion, and creation of new folders.
10-32
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Data from other devices can be accessed from an application on a computer by going through the networks. This is referred to as SPMA (Single Port Multi Access). When transferring screen data from the NS-Designer, users can send it to the PT through a PLC connected with the PT by a Serial,
Ethernet, or Controller Link network.
When transferring/monitoring data, such as a ladder program, from the CX-Programmer, users can also send it to the PLC through the PT connected with the PLC by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link network.
♦
Be sure to confirm safety at the destination PT before transferring screen data. In particular, before transferring data using SPMA, be sure to confirm the network address, node address, and unit number.
Screen data can be uploaded/downloaded from the NS-Designer to/from a PT connected by serial,
Ethernet, or Controller Link communications through the PLC (CS/CJ-series PLCs only) connected with the PT by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link network. In addition, the data can be downloaded/uploaded to a Memory Card placed in the PT.
Ethernet/Controller Link
Serial (Tool bus) or modem
CS/CJ-series PLC
NS-Designer
PT
Computer
Serial 1:N NT Link
Ethernet/Controller Link
PT
10-33
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Data, such as a ladder program, can be uploaded/downloaded from the CX-Programmer to a PLC connected by a Serial or Controller Link network through a PT connected with the PLC by an Ethernet network.
NS-Designer NS-Designer
Ethernet
Controller Link
1:N NT Link 1:N NT Link
PT PT
PLC PLC
Ethernet
Controller Link
PLC PLC
♦
♦
♦
The CX-Net cannot be used when using the CX-Programmer through the PT.
Updating screen display and responses of touch input actions may slow down when using the
CX-Programmer through the PT.
Correct operation is possible only for the configurations described in this manual.
Screen data can be transferred from the NS-Designer to the PT as shown below. Procedures are different depending on the configuration.
Comms.Setting
Computer-PLC PLC-PT
Screen Data
Details
NS-Designer
Serial (Tool Bus/modem)
CPU Unit
Serial, 1:N NT Links
See P10-36.
Serial COM
Modem
Serial
CS/CJ-series
PLCs (Relay)
Ethernet/Controller Link
See P10-39.
Serial COM
Modem
Ethernet or
Controller Link
Ethernet/Controller Link
CPU Unit
Serial, 1:N NT Links
See P10-44.
Ethernet
Controller Link
Serial
Ethernet/Controller Link
See P10-49.
Ethernet
Controller Link
Controller Link
* Cables must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit by a serial 1:N NT Link. To make settings for the expansion routing tables (routing tables that treat serial communications as Network communications), CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later is required
.
To transfer screen data to a PT through a PLC, one of the following CPU Units (Lot No. 030201 and later) is required. CPU Units and lot numbers not listed in the following table do not support this function.
10-34
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
PLC series
CJ Series
CS Series
CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66 H
CJ1G-CPU42 H
CJ1G-CPU43 H
CJ1G-CPU44 H
CJ1G-CPU45 H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64 H
CS1H-CPU65 H
CS1H-CPU66 H
CS1H-CPU67 H
CS1G-CPU42 H
CS1G-CPU43 H
CS1G-CPU44 H
CS1G-CPU45 H
CS1D-CPU42S
CS1D-CPU44S
CS1D-CPU65S
CS1D-CPU67S
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Lot number
030201 and later
♦
♦
♦
To send screen data to a PT through a PLC that is connected with a PT by a Serial network, the PT must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit. The screen data cannot be transferred to a PT connected with the RS-232C port on a Serial Communications
Board or a RS-422A/485 port of the PLC.
When connecting the PLC and PT by a Serial network (1:N NT Links), set
NT Link Max
on the
Settings
– Host Link Port
Tab Page in the CX-Programmer to a value greater than 1.
Before transferring screen data from the NS-Designer to a PT that is connected by a Serial network
(1:N NT Links) through the PLC, confirm that
High Speed
is
ON
under
Option
–
Pass Through PLC
Settings
of the
Screen Data Transfer
tool.
10-35
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
The following configuration allows transferring and monitoring a PLC from the CX-Programmer.
CX-Programmer/
NS-Designer
Ladder program, etc.
Ethernet
*
Serial 1:N NT Links
PT (Relay)
Controller Link
CX-Programmer/
NS-Designer
Controller Link
*
PT (Relay)
Serial 1:N NT Links
Ethernet
* Cannot transfer/monitor data, such as a ladder program, passing through the PT when the computer
(CX-Programmer) is connected to the PT using serial communications, a modem, or a USB cable.
CX-Programmer/
NS-Designer
Ladder program, etc.
Serial
(Toolbus/Modem), USB
Serial 1:N NT Links
Cannot pass through the PT
PT (Relay)
Controller Link
To explain details of settings simply, procedures are described as tutorial with examples depending on the configuration. The values such as IP Addresses, Network Addresses described below are the examples so please set those in accordance with the actual environment.
■
This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected either an RS-232C port or a peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit by a Serial (1:N NT Link) connection through a PLC connected with the computer by serial (Peripheral bus) connection. In this example, the cable between the computer and the PLC is connected to the peripheral port on the PLC and the cable between the PLC and the PT is connected to the RS-232C port on the PLC.
10-36
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
PT
Screen Data
NS-Designer
Serial (Tool bus)
Communications Method between computer and PLC:
Serial COM
Serial (1:N NT Links)
Communications Method between PT and PLC:
Serial
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting using the above system configuration.
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial 1:N NT Link communications. For information on connection methods for 1:N NT Links, refer to
Section 4 Connecting the
Host to Serial Port
in the
NS series Setup Manual
.
1. Open the desired project on NS-Designer and select
File - Screen Data Transfer
. The Screen data
Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button on the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Setting Dialog
Box will appear.
3. Select Pass Through PLC option.
4. Select the communications method between computer and PLC. Here,
Serial (Toolbus)
is set as an example.
5. Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Here,
NT Link
is set as an example.
Select when transferring data via a PLC.
Select communications method between the computer and PLC. (Serial (Toolbus) is selected as an example.)
Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. (Here, NT
Link is selected as an example.) the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following
Serial Setting
Dialog Box will appear.
10-37
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
(1) Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.
(2) Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC.
(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate between the computer and PLC.
(4) Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.
1
2
3
4
Port
Baud rate
Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.
Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 37400,
57600, or 115200.
Detect baud rate Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the
PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
Response monitor time Input the response monitor time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error. the to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here
COM1
is set as and example. the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box. the Button on the right of the
NS
and
PLC
Field.
Enter the port to use to connect the PT and PLC.
Enter the unit number of the destination
PT set for the NT Link (1:N).
10. Set the port to use to connect PLC and the unit number of the PT that will be the destination. Here, the unit number is set to 0 because the cable is connected to the RS-232C port with a 1:1 connection.
11. Click the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
12. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.
10-38
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
2.
Check
Select All,
and click the button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box.
the Button. The download will be started.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the
YES
Button to restart the PT. Click the
NO
Button to continue downloading data.
Even if the
NO
Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
If the
YES
Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
NO
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel
Button.
■
This section describes an example of the settings used when transferring screen data from the
NS-Designer to a PT connected by Ethernet through a PLC connected with the computer by a serial
(toolbus) connection.
10-39
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Screen Data
Serial (Toolbus)
Ethernet
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Ethernet Settings
Ethernet Unit Setting
Node Address
IP Address
Unit Number
6
192.168.0.6
1
Node Address
IP Address
Ethernet network address
22
192.168.0.22
3
Create the following routing table entry using CX-Net of CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer the routing tables to the PLC.
1. Input the unit number of the Ethernet Unit. Here,
1
is input.
2. Input the network address of the Ethernet Unit. Here,
3
is input.
♦
♦
Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on the PLC’s CPU Unit when connecting a device other than a computer running the CX-Programmer (such as a PT or host computer).
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting a computer running the CX-Programmer.
10-40
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to the PT along with the screen data.
1. Select on the NS-Designer.
2. Set to
Enable
. the Tab and make the following settings.
Set the same IP address as that of the PT. Here,
192.168.0.22
is set as an example.
4. Set the subnet mask of the PT. Here,
255.255.255.0
is set as an example. the Button to display the IP Address Setting Dialog Box.
Set the same Node Address and IP Address as those set in the Ethernet Unit. Here,
6
is set for
Node Address and
192.168.0.6
is set for the IP Address as examples. the Button.
7. Transfer the settings with the screen data to the PT. To do this, connect the PT with the computer directly and perform standard data transfer. Do NOT transfer the data through the PLC.
1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select
File
-
Screen Data Transfer
.
The Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button on the top right of the dialog box. The
Comms.Setting
Dialog
Box will appear.
4. Select the communications method between the computer and PLC. Set
Serial (Toolbus).
5. Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Set
Ethernet
.
10-41
Section 10 Transferring Data 10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Make sure to select when transferring data through a PLC.
Select the communications method between the computer and PLC, (Here, Serial
(Toolbus) is selected as an example.)
Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. (Here, Ethernet is selected as an example.) the Button on the right of the communications method setting. The following Serial
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
(1) Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.
(2) Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC.
(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate between the computer and PLC.
(4) Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.
1
2
3
Port
Baud Rate
Set the COM port on the computer to use to connect the computer and
PLC.
Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 34700,
57600, or 115200.
Baud Rate Auto-Detect Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the
PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.
Time frequent communications error.
7. Set the Port to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here
COM1
is set as an example. the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box. the Button on the right of the
NS and PLC
Field. The Ethernet Setting Dialog Box shown below will be displayed.
10-42
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
10. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using
CX-Net). Here, 3 is set as the Network Address for Ethernet communications.
11. Set the Node Address of the destination PT for the
Node Address
. Here, the node address of the
PT is input. Here, 22 is set as an example.
12. Click the Button in the Ethernet Setting Dialog Box.
13. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
the button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the window will switch to the following window. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.
2. Select
,
and click the button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box. the Button. The download will be started.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the
YES
Button to restart the PT. Click the
NO
Button to continue downloading data.
Even if the
NO
Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when
10-43
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
the Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
NO
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel
Button.
■
This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected with either the RS-232C port or peripheral port in the PLC by a Serial connection through a PLC connected by Ethernet.
Screen Data
NS-Designer
PT
Communication Method between computer and
PLC: Ethernet
Communication Method between PT and PLC: Serial
NS-Designer
IP Address on the computer
Network
Address
Node
Address
192.168.0.10
1
10
Ethernet Unit Setting
IP Address
Local
Network
Address
Node
Address
Unit No.
192.168.0.6
1
6 (rotary switch)
1 (rotary switch)
Serial Setting
Network Address for Serial
Communications
NT Link unit number of the PT
3
0
Routing Table Setting
Local Network Table
Unit No.
1 (Unit No. of the Ethernet Unit)
252: RS-232C Port
253: Peripheral Port
1
3
Local Network
Address
Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address (rotary switch setting).
For instance, set values as follows:
IP Address: 192.168.0.6
Network Address: 1
Node Address: 6
Refer to the
Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit
in the
Tutorial Manual
for details on settings.
1. Create the routing tables using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer them to the
10-44
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
PLC. Create the local network table treating either the RS232-C port or peripheral port as the
Communications Unit by setting the items shown below.
Treat the RS-232C port as the Communications Unit. Set 252 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local
Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.
Unit Number
252 (serial port)
Local Network Address
3
Treat the peripheral port as the Communications Unit. Set 253 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local
Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.
Unit Number
253 (peripheral port)
Local Network Address
3
2. Add the Local Network Table for PLC Ethernet Unit in the same manner.
Set 1 for the SIOU and 1 for Local Network.
Unit Number Local Network Address
1 1
There is no need to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by Serial (1:N NT Link) connection.
1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select
File
-
Screen Data Transfer
. The Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button at the top right of the dialog box. The
Comms.Setting
Dialog
Box will appear.
3. Select .
4. Select the communications method under
Computer
. Here,
Ethernet
is set.
5. Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Set
NT Link
under
NS and PLC
.
10-45
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Select this option to transfer through the PLC.
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Set the communications method between the computer and PLC.
Select the communications method between the
PLC and PT. the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
Set the Ethernet network address.
Set the network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit.
Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.
7. Input the Ethernet network address for the
Network
of the FINS source address. Here,
1
is set as an example.
8. Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the
Network
and
Node
of the FINS destination address. Here,
1
is set for the
Network
and
6
is set for the
Node
as an example.
9. Click the
Driver
Tab and make the following settings.
10-46
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Set the IP address of the PLC’s
Ethernet Unit.
10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here,
192.168.0.6
is set for the
IP Address
as an example.
11. Click the Button in the Network Settings Dialog Box.
12. Click the Button on the right of the
NS and PLC
Field. The Serial Setting Dialog Box shown below will be displayed.
Set the serial communications network address
(the value set for the local network table in the
CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.
Input the unit number of the PT that is the target of the 1:N NT Link.
13. Set the serial communications network address (the value set for the local network table in the
CX-Net) between the PT and PLC. Set 3 as the Serial communications network address.
14. Set the unit number of the destination PT. Here, 0 is set because the RS-232C port is connected
1:1.
15. Click the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.
16. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.
10-47
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.
2. Select , and click the Button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box. the Button. The download will be started.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The
PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the
YES
Button to restart the PT. Click the
NO
Button to continue downloading data.
Even if the
NO
Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. the Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the
NO
Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the
Cancel
Button.
10-48
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
■
Screen Data
NS-Designer
PT
Communication method between computer and
PLC: Ethernet
Communication method between PT and PLC: Controller Link
NS-Designer IP
Address on the computer
Network Address
Node Address
192.168.1.0
1
0
Ethernet Unit Setting
IP Address
Local Network
Address
Node Address
Unit No.
192.168.0.6
1
6 (rotary switch)
1 (rotary switch)
Controller Link Unit Setting
Network Address for
Controller Link
Communications
3
Node Address 4
Unit Address 2
PT Setting
Network Address
Controller Link Unit
Node Address
3
5
Routing Table Setting
Local Network Table
Unit No.
Local Network
Address
1 (Unit No. of the
Ethernet Unit)
2 (Unit No. of the
Controller Link Unit)
1
3
1. Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address
(rotary switch setting).
For instance, set values as follows:
IP Address: 192.168.0.6
Network Address: 1
Node Address: 6
Note: Refer to the
Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit
in the Tutorial Manual for details on settings.
2. Set the Node Address and Network Address of the PLC Controller Link Unit.
For instance, set values as follows:
Node Address: 4
Network Address: 3 to (W309) for details on settings.
3. Create the following routing table using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer it to the PLC.
Unit Number Local Network Address
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link Unit
1
2
1
3
10-49
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to the PT along with the screen data.
1. Select in NS-Designer.
2. Set to
Enable
and click the
Routing Table Setting
Button. The Routing Table
Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Input 1 as the
Destination Network Address
, 3 as the
Remote Network Address
, and 4 as the
Gateway Node Address
(Controller Link Unit’s node address). Click the
OK
Button to return to the
System Setting Dialog Box.
4. Transfer the above settings along with any desired screen data to the PT. At this time, connect the
PT directly to the computer. Perform normal screen transfer without selecting
Pass Through PLC
.
1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select
File
-
Screen Data Transfer
. The Screen
Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.
10-50
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
the Button at the top right of the dialog box. The
Comms.Method
Dialog
Box will appear.
3. Select .
4. Select the communications method under
Computer
. Here,
Ethernet
is set.
5. Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Here,
CLK
(Controller Link) is set.
Select this option to transfer through the PLC.
Select the communications method between the computer and PLC.
Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network
Setting Dialog Box will appear.
Set the Ethernet network address
Set the network address and node number of the PLC’s
Ethernet Unit.
Input the response monitor time.
Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.
7. Input the Ethernet network address for the
Network
of the FINS source address. Here,
1
is set as an example.
8. Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the
Network
and
Node
of the FINS destination address. Here the network address is set to
1
and the node number is set to
6
as examples. the Tab and make the following settings.
10-51
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Set the IP address of the
PLC’s Ethernet Uniti.
10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here,
192.168.0.6
is input as an example.
11. Click the Button in the Network Setting Dialog Box.
12. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using
CX-Net). In this example, 3 was set as the Network Address for Controller Link communications and so set 3.
13. Set the Node Address of the destination PT. In this example, set the Node Address of the PT’s
Controller Link Unit, i.e., set 5.
Set the Controller Link communications network address (the value set for the local network table in the CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.
Set the unit number of the PT that will be the destination.
14. Click the Button.
10-52
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
■
Transferring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from a Computer to a PLC through a PT Connected to the Computer via Ethernet and Connected to the PLC via Serial 1:N NT Link
Ladder program, etc.
Ethernet
Serial 1:N NT Links
IP Address:
192.168.0.10
Node Address: 22
IP Address:
192.168.0.22
Network Address: 1
Go to the
System Menu
-
Comm
Tab Page. Press the
Enable
Button under
Ethernet
to display settings on the right side of the screen. Set these items in the way shown in the following table.
It is also possible to make the following settings in the NS-Designer’s system settings, and transfer them together with any desired screen data beforehand.
Item Setting
Network address 1 (network address between the computer and PT)
Node address
IP address
Subnet mask
IP address (of computer)
22 (PT’s node address)
192.168.0.22 (PT’s IP address)
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.10
It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial communications (1:N
NT Link).
1. Start up CX-Programmer. Then, set the IP address of the PT in the
IP Address
on the
Network Settings
-
Driver
Tab Page.
2. Click the Tab and set the items in the table below.
FINS Source Address
FINS Destination Address
Node
Item Setting
Frame Length
Set the local network address of the PT.
Connection via serial port A: 111
Connection via serial port B: 112
Here, 10 is set as an example.
Here, 1000 is set as an example.
Response Timeout Default value is 2.
10-53
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Reference
♦
The node set from the
Network
Tab Page is fixed at 1. Transfer will not be performed correctly if another number is set. Be sure to set 1.
3. After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).
The following example shows how to perform settings for transferring data, such as a ladder program, from CX-Programmer, via a PT connected via Ethernet, to a PLC connected via Controller Link.
Ladder program, etc.
Ethernet Controller Link
IP Address:
192.168.0.10
IP Address:
192.168.0.22
Node Address: 22
Controller Link Unit’s
Node Address: 5
Network Address: 1
Controller Link Unit’s
Node Address: 4
Controller Link Unit’s
Unit Number: 2
Network Address: 3
Perform the following settings with NS-Designer.
1. Select on the NS-Designer.
2. Set and
Ethernet
to
Enable
, click the
Controller Link
Tab, and make the following settings.
Set the network address for Controller
Link communications between the PT and PLC.
Set the unit number for the PT’s
Controller Link Unit.
10-54
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
the Tab and make the following settings.
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
4. Set the network address between the computer and NS-Designer as the network address. In this example,
1
is set.
5. Set the PT’s node address as the node address. In this example,
22
is set.
6. Set the IP address set for the PT as the IP address. In this example,
192.168.0.22
is set.
7. Next set the subnet mask. In this example,
255.255.255.0
is set.
8. Next, click the
Add
Button at the bottom left of the dialog box to display the IP Address Setting
Dialog Box. In this example, the node address and IP address set for the PT and computer are set. the Button.
10. Transfer the above settings together with any desired screen data to the PT.
Start up CX-Programmer. Connect the computer directly to the PLC. Create the following routing table and transfer it to the PLC.
SIOU (unit number of the PLC’s Controller
Link Unit)
Item Setting
2
Local Network
Remote Network
Relay Network
Relay Node
3
1
3
5
10-55
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
Start up CX-Programmer.
1. Set the IP address of the PT in the
IP Address
on the
Network Settings
-
Driver
Tab Page. the Tab and make the following settings.
FINS Source Address – Network (between computer and PT)
Item Setting
1
FINS Destination Address – Network (between PT and PLC)
3
Node 4
10-56
Section 10 Transferring Data
NS-Designer Operation Manual
10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA
3. After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).
Refer to the manual for the CX-Programmer for details on transferring ladder programs.
10-57
Section 11 Printing
NS-Designer Operation Manual
This section describes functions provided for printing.
Section 11 Printing 11-1 Printing Project Information
Project information can be printed. The information that can be printed is given below.
Information Details
Screen Title List
Sheet Title List
Prints a list of screen titles.
Prints a list of sheet screen titles.
Alarm Setting List
Unit & Scale List
Password Setting
System Data (Labels, System Setting)
Prints a list of registered alarms and events.
Prints a list of registered numeric units and scales.
To print only registered items turn ON
Print Set Item Only.
Prints a list of registered passwords.
Prints a list of label switch names and system settings.
1. Select
File - Print
.
2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the
Project Information
Tab.
3. Select the information to be printed.
1
2
3
5
4
No. Item
1
Include Select the information to be printed.
Details
2
3
4
5
Printing Items List Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.
Print to File
Inverse Print
Preview Button
Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.
Reverses black and white when printing.
Click this button to see a preview of the printed image.
♦
Project information will be printed normally even if
Reverse black and white
is selected.
4. Click the
OK
Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Click the
OK
Button to start printing.
11-1
Section 11 Printing
Some samples of printer output are shown below.
The project file name and project title are printed.
Screen/Sheet Title Lists
Only the titles of screen pages that have been created are printed.
11-1 Printing Project Information
Alarm Setting List
High
Middle
Unit and Scale Settings
11-2
Section 11 Printing
Password Settings
System Data
11-1 Printing Project Information
11-3
Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information
User screen information can be printed. The following information can be printed.
Item Details
Screen Hard Copy
Functional Object List
Property Setting
Prints a hardcopy of the screen.
Prints a list of the functional objects in each screen.
Prints a list of the properties of the functional objects in each screen.
1. Select
File - Print
.
2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the
Page Information
Tab and select the range to be printed.
3. Select the information and ranges to be printed. (Click the
Details
Button to set the information to be printed.)
1
2
3
4
6
5
11-4
Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information
No. Item
1 Include
Details
Select the information to be printed.
Click the
Details
Button to display the following dialog box and select the information to be printed.
2
3
4
5
Print Select the range of screens to be printed from the following options.
All
Pages
Prints information on all screens that are used.
Prints information on the specified screens.
Printing Items List Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.
Print to File
Inverse Print
Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.
Reverses black and white when printing.
Example:
Normal display
Reverse black and white display
Click this button to see a preview of the printed image. 6 Preview Button
4. Click the
OK
Button.
The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
5. Click the
OK
Button to start printing.
♦
Project information will be printed normally even if
Inverse Print
is selected.
11-5
Section 11 Printing
Some samples of printer output are shown below.
The screen page number and screen title are printed.
Screen Hard Copy
11-2 Printing Page Information
Functional Object List
Property Settings
The property settings on each tab page are printed.
11-6
Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information
♦
All property information for objects will be printed for property settings. This may result in a large number of pages being printed.
It is recommended that the Functional Object List is used to more efficiently check object settings.
The Functional Object List can be saved to a CSV file, which can also be printed.
Select
Tools - Functional Object List
, select the desired range, and click the
Save
Button to save the Functional Object List to a CSV file. Refer to
5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used
for details on operating procedures.
♦
With data block tables, only the settings for each tab page in the Property Settings Dialog Box are printed. Settings for each data block field (e.g., communications addresses, data formats, keypads) are not printed.
11-7
Section 11 Printing 11-3 Previews
Previews can be displayed of the printer output for project information or page information.
1. Select the items to be printed in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Click the
Preview
Button.
A preview window will be displayed. Operating procedures for the preview window are the same as those for the standard Windows® preview window.
Example for Printing Page Information
3. To return to the Print Dialog Box from the Preview Window, click the
Button in the Preview
Window.
♦
The header and footer information can also be checked on the preview. Refer to
11-5 Headers and
Footers
for information on headers and footers.
♦
To close the Preview Window and Editing Window, click the
Close
Button in the Preview Window.
11-8
Section 11 Printing 11-4 Outputting to an RTF File
The selected project or page information can be printed to an RTF (rich text format) file. RTF files can be edited with MS Word and other word processing software.
The procedure for outputting to an RTF file is as follows:
1. Select the items to be output to the RTF file in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Select
Print to File
.
3. Click the
OK
Button.
4. The dialog box shown below will be displayed.
Specify the directory and file name where the RTF file will be saved, and click the
Save
Button.
11-9
Section 11 Printing 11-5 Headers and Footers
Headers and footers can be added to the documents to be printed.
The header is the margin at the top of the page and the footer is the space at the page where the page number, date, time, and text strings can be printed.
A sample of a printed header and footer is shown below.
(1) Date (2) Time (3) Project name (4) Page number (5) Text string
1 2 3 5
Header
00/05/0515:54:21 Project 1 Text
10
Text
Footer
4
5
1. Select the
Header
Tab or the
Footer
Tab in the Print Dialog Box.
2. Select the items to insert into the header/footer and the locations for the items.
1
2
11-10
Section 11 Printing 11-5 Headers and Footers
No. Item
1
Details
Position The insertion position for text strings in headers and footers can be set to left, center, or right.
2 Items Use the following procedure to set the items to insert.
1. Place the cursor at the insertion position.
2. Select the item to insert from the combo box and click the
Add
Button.
“&” followed by the printing item name will appear in the input field. "&" does not have to be added when inputting character strings.
Example: The following settings will produce the header and footer shown in the previous sample.
Header
Footer
11-11
Section 11 Printing 11-6 Margins
Set the distances from the edge of the paper to the printed characters. The project or page information will be printed inside the area bounded by the margins. The header and footer will be printed in the margins.
1. Select the
Margins
Tab of the Print Dialog Box.
2. Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.
1
2
No. Item
1 Units
Details
Select centimeters or inches for the margins set in item 2, below.
2 Margins Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.
Each margin can be set to between 0 and 10 centimeters (0 and 4 inches).
11-12
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files
This section describes the methods used to import and export property information for functional objects as CSV files.
The CSV files that are exported can be edited using spreadsheet software or a text editor and then reimported to set functional object properties in a "batch" operation.
The following items can be edited in the CSV files.
•
Address settings
• Comment settings
•
Label settings
Functional objects cannot be added or deleted.
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-1 Exporting CSV Files
The property information for functional objects in the entire project or for selected screens can be exported to a CSV file.
1. Select
File - Export CSV File
.
2. The Export CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the range to be exported and then click the
OK
Button.
Add a checkmark to start the spreadsheet software automatically and open the CSV file when it is exported.
A dialog box to specify the location in which to save the CSV file will be displayed.
Reference
♦
When exporting CSV files on Windows 2000 or XP, Unicode or ASCII can be selected as the output code. To translate a label, for example from Japanese into Chinese, using Excel, select Unicode.
Unicode, however, is not supported for Windows 95, 98, and NT, i.e., the output code is always
ASCII (multibyte). Windows 2000 or XP is required to specify Unicode.
For details, refer to
13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export
Function.
Reference
♦
Edit CSV file after exporting
can be turned ON when exporting to the CSV file to automatically start the application associated with the CSV extension. If the executable file for the associated application cannot be found, the following error message will be displayed.
Specify the executable file to start the application and open the exported CSV file.
12-1
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-2 Editing CSV Files
CSV files can be edited with spreadsheet software or a text editor.
In the CSV file, the labels, comments, and addresses set for the functional objects can be edited.
1. Open the CSV file that was exported to the spreadsheet software or text editor.
If
Edit CSV file after exporting
was turned ON when exporting to the CSV file, the spreadsheet software or text editor associated with the CSV extension will be started and the file will be opened automatically.
NS-Designer internal information
Project file name
Screen file name
Functional object types and settable properties
Screen page number
ID number
Property settings input field
Example 1: Changing the write address for an ON/OFF button from $B0 to $B10.
Example 2: Setting the label for a command button to "Screen 1."
2. After editing, confirm that the extension of the filename is CSV and save the file.
Reference
♦
Objects and screens cannot be added or deleted from the CSV file.
♦
When the file is closed, a message warning that some changes may be lost if the file is saved in the current format may be displayed. This will not adversely affect PT operation.
♦
The file contains internal information required by the NS-Designer when the file is imported
(****VER3). Do not edit this information.
12-2
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files
CSV files that have been edited externally can be reimported into the NS-Designer to change the property information of the entire project or selected screens. An error check will be performed on the
CSV file when importing.
1. Select
File - Import CSV File
.
2. The Import CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the range to be imported and then click the
OK
Button.
3. A dialog box will be displayed to select the CSV file to import.
Specify the file and click the
Open
Button.
4. A dialog box to notify that the import operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the
OK
Button.
12-3
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files
An error list will be displayed if any errors are found during validation when importing. To edit the CSV file, click the
Edit CSV
Button. The spreadsheet software or text editor will be started and the imported CSV file will be opened.
Reference
♦
Any of the following operations in CSV file editing will cause errors when importing a CSV file.
1. Deleting rows or columns
2. Adding rows or columns
3. Changing or deleting the NS-Designer internal information on line 1 (****VER3)
4. Changing project file names, screen page file names, or screen page numbers
5. Changing functional object ID numbers
6. Changing property names
3. NS-Designer internal information
4. Project file name
4. Screen page file name
5. Functional object ID number
4. Screen page number
6. Property name
♦
Do not save CSV files in Unicode. An error will occur if CSV files saved in Unicode are imported.
12-4
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files
No.
Details
1
2
Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.
Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.
Error
No.
1
Details Countermeasure
Address or label setting is not correct.
1. Confirm that addresses are set within the range of the number of addresses set in the System Settings.
2. Confirm that the format of address settings is correct.
2 Format error in imported CSV file.
3. Confirm that none of the labels are too long.
Check that the imported file is in CSV format.
Close any unnecessary applications and re-execute the import operation.
4 ory. Settings contained in CSV file cannot be imported.
Could not open the
CSV file. CSV file could not be imported.
Check that the file is not being used by another application. If the file is being used by another application, close the file and then re-execute the import operation.
5 A project file name or screen file name specified in the
CSV file does not exist.
Refer to the following and insert the project file names or screen file names.
Row 1
Column A Column B Column C
1
Row 2
2
3
Columns are A, B, and C in order from the left. Rows are 1, 2, and
3 in order from the top.
1. The project file name is specified in the B column in the rows with a "1" in the A column. (The version is specified in row 1 of the B column, however, so the project file name is specified in row 2.)
Format: ***project name
Example: If the project name is "Test": ***Test
2. The screen file name is specified in the C column in the rows with a "2" in the A column. (The project file name is specified in row 1 of the B column, however, so the screen file name is specified in row 3.)
Format: **PNLPG screen page number/sheet page number.IPW
Screen page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers starting from 000.
Sheet page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers in the range FFF (page number 0) to FF6 (page number 9).
Example: If the screen page number is 16:
**PNLPG010.IPW
Example: If the sheet page number is 3: **PNLPGFFC.IPW
Details on the error that was detected will be displayed. The format is as follows:
Row number, screen page number, ID number, and error detection identifier
For the previous dialog box, there is a mistake in the CSV format of the Numeral Display Object with
ID number NUM0003 located on screen page number 0 on line 9.
12-5
Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files
When importing a CSV file of screen data that has been set using multiple label settings, the specified label attributes can be applied to all the labels.
1
2
No. Item
1 Apply the text attributes of specified label
No.
Details
Select to apply attributes. If the number of set labels is 1, this option is disabled.
2 Label Select the name of the label to which the attributes are to be applied.
Reference
♦
The following items are affected when label properties are applied.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Font name
Font size
Font style
Vertical position
Horizontal position
Text color
♦
If label attributes are applied to a CSV file that has been reedited, such as by adding screen data, and then imported after label attributes were applied, the label attributes will also be applied to the previous data for the selected label name.
12-6
Section 13 Multi-language Display
This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen using the label switching function or the indirect specification function, or by importing/exporting CSV files.
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-1 Overview
Multi-language displays use Unicode for the character information displayed in a screen. This enables switching the screen between different languages, such as Japanese, English, and Chinese.
NS-series PTs use the label switching function, the object character string indirect reference function
(e.g., for list selection or text), and the CSV file import/export function to implement multi-language displays.
A computer environment (Windows 2000 or Window XP) that supports creating Unicode data is required for multi-language displays.
This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen.
13-1
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
The following methods can be used to create screens that allow multi-language display.
1. Input multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings.
2. Display multi-language characters using indirect object specification.
3. Create multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function.
Settings on the PC
In order to create screen data with NS-Designer using the multi-language function, it is necessary to perform Windows settings beforehand. The settings are made from the Windows Control Panel. The actual settings required depend on the input language. Perform settings in the way indicated in the following table.
Language used
Japanese
Western European languages
(German, Spanish, etc.)
Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul
Input method
IME (MS-IME, ATOK, etc.)
Character Map
On-screen Keyboard
IME (MS-PinYin98, etc.)
PC setting
Not required (Use standard setting.)
Not required (Use standard setting.)
Additional setting for input locale
Additional setting for input locale
(input system setting)
Note: The PC settings are used by other functions as well and so be sure to make these settings before creating a multi-language display screen.
Reference
♦
Use Windows 2000 or XP when creating multi-language screen data with NS-Designer. The creation of multi-language screen data is not possible with Windows 95, 98, ME, or NT.
13-2
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
The windows shown in the following explanations are for Windows 2000.
1. Open and select the Input Locales Tab Page. Click the
Add
Button.
•
In Windows XP, open
Control Panel – Regional Options
and select the Languages Tab
Page. Click the
Details
Button under
Text services and input languages
.
2. The following window will be displayed. Select the language to be input under
Input locale
(
Input language
in Windows XP) and click the
OK
Button.
3.
Switch between input locales
is automatically set under
Hot keys for input locales
. Also the
Enable indicator on taskbar
option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is
None
, change the setting with the
Change Key Sequence
Button (
Key Settings
Button in Windows XP).
13-3
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
the Button to complete the settings.
5. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes when the left Alt Key and Shift Key are pressed.
•
When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:
•
When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:
In this example, German was added. Use the same procedure to add Spanish or any other western
European language. Set as many languages as required.
In order to input Asian languages, such as Chinese, the appropriate input system and fonts must be installed. As an example, the setting procedure required for inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98 is explained below.
Add Chinese to the system language settings.
1. Open .
2. Under (
Code page conversion tables
in Windows XP), select the
Simplified Chinese
option and click the
OK
Button. The Windows CD-ROM may be required at this point. the Button is pressed, a prompt asking whether or not to restart Windows will be dis-
13-4
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
played. Restart Windows.
The fonts required to display Chinese characters will be displayed.
In this example, Simplified Chinese was added. Use the same procedure to add Traditional Chinese or
Hangul. Select Traditional Chinese and Korean in the list box.
1. Open
Control Panel – Regional Options
, select the Input Locales Tab Page, click the
Add
Button, and add Chinese under
Input locale
.
•
In Windows XP, open
Control Panel – Regional Options
, and select the Languages Tab
Page. Click the
Details
Button under
Text services and input languages
and add Chinese.
There are several types of Chinese input system (IME). In this example, the input system
MS-PinYin98 is selected.
Click the
OK
Button.
2.
Switch between input locales
is automatically set under
Hot keys for input locales
. Also the
Enable indicator on taskbar
option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is
None
, change the setting with the
Change Key Sequence
Button (
Key Settings
Button in Windows XP).
13-5
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
the Button to complete the settings.
4. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes when the left ALT Key and SHIFT Key are pressed.
•
When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:
•
When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:
•
When inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98:
The method for inputting multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings is explained below.
1. Select the language to be input either after clicking the indicator on the Windows taskbar or by using the Alt and Shift Keys.
13-6
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
2. Input the required characters in the
Label
input box in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the required objects.
Reference
♦
”IME” stands for “Input Method Editor” and is an input system for inputting special language characters from the keyboard. It can, for example, be used to convert characters to and from those used in Japanese. There are IME systems for different languages; for example, MS-IME2000 or ATOK can be used for Japanese and MS-PinYin98 can be used for Chinese. There are systems that come with Windows and systems that can be purchased separately. Refer to the software manual or help file for details.
”On-screen Keyboard” is a standard Windows program that allows a keyboard to be displayed on the screen and characters to be input using this keyboard. It is started by selecting
Programs – Accessories – Accessibility – On-screen Keyboard
. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed.
In this case, install it from
Control Panel – Add/Remove Programs – Add/Remove Windows Components
.
The following image is for input in English. If the input locale is switched to another language in the way mentioned later, the keyboard display will change accordingly.
13-7
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
”Character Map” is a standard Windows program that allows characters to be selected from a list and then input into the application as desired. It is started by selecting
Programs – Accessories – System
Tools – Character Map
. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed. In this case, install it from
Control Panel – Add/Delete Programs – Add/Delete Windows Components
.
The characters outlined in the following image are the western European characters that can be input with the NS Series. Regardless of the input locale setting mentioned later, these characters can always be input with NS-Designer.
Note: In some circumstances, the characters outside the outlined section may not be displayed on NS-Designer or the PT.
Character strings are input using the Character Map in the following way.
1. Insert the desired characters in
Characters to copy
by double-clicking them in order.
2. Once all the desired characters have been inserted, click the
Copy
Button.
3. Input the character string in the desired place in NS-Designer using Ctrl-V (i.e., press the Ctrl and
V Keys at the same time to copy the character string).
13-8
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
Reference
♦
Unicode
Characters are input and displayed on a computer (not just with the NS Series), using a character code. Each character is assigned a number based on this code.
For example, the number 41 hex is assigned to the letter “A”. Sentences can be constructed, words can be arranged, and characters can be displayed on the screen using this code.
ISO has established a character code for alphanumeric characters (i.e., numbers and letters of the alphabet). Windows and the NS Series use the ISO8859/1 character code to represent characters for English, French, Italian, German, and other western European languages.
Asian languages, such as Japanese, Simplified Chinese, and Traditional Chinese use a large number of characters and there are character codes for these languages that have been defined by standards organizations (e.g., JIS in Japan and GB in China).
“Unicode” is a character code that was established with the purpose of unifying the various western
European and Asian languages. Windows NT, 2000, and XP as well the NS Series use Unicode to achieve multi-language display with ease.
With the NS Series, multi-language display is created when Unicode-format text files for text objects and list objects with multi-language input are read. Also, with data block tables, reading/writing of data files is possible in Unicode format. Unicode format also allows multi-language display to be used for the log output of alarm/event history and the import/export of CSV files.
The objects for which data can be read or displayed using Unicode are given in the following table.
List objects
Text objects
Object name
Data block settings
Log output
Operation
Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read and displayed as lists.
Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read and displayed.
Data files are read and written.
CSV files edited in Unicode format can be imported and exported. Log output to CF is also possible.
In order to display multiple languages using indirect specification of object properties, the following settings are required.
1. Create the indirectly specified Unicode text.
2. In the Property Settings Dialog Box for the objects, set the character code to Unicode.
3. Specify the indirectly specified file name in the Property Settings Dialog Box.
13-9
Section 13 Multi-language Display
Text Objects
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
Data Block Objects
13-10
Section 13 Multi-language Display
Alarm/Event History
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
This section describes the procedure for creating multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function. The following diagram outlines the screen creation procedure.
Screen data CSV file Excel
1. Create English screen with NS-
Designer.
NS-Designer
English screen
Switch labels
Chinese screen
2. Export (Select
Unicode as the output code.)
CSV file
English labels
Select a text file as the file type to read the file.
Select commadelimited or text string.
3. CSV file
After editing the English and Chinese labels, save the file in Unicode format (.txt).
Have the English in the CSV file translated into Chinese.
4. Import
Text file
English labels
Chinese labels
Save
Before creating a screen, set more than one for
No. of Labels
on the Project Property Dialog Box to switch languages during machine operation. Then, create a screen in English in the usual way.
13-11
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
(The number of labels can be changed after creating a screen.)
Export the created screen data to a CSV file using NS-Designer. When doing this, select Unicode as the output code.
Edit the CSV file with a version of Excel that supports Unicode (Excel 2000 or 2002). Make sure that the CSV file is loaded from the Open Dialog Box opened from the File Menu on Excel and opened by starting the Text File Wizard. If the CSV file is opened without starting the Text File Wizard (opened by drag-and-drop or by associating the file type with the program), according to Excel specifications,
Unicode data may not be loaded correctly and garbled characters and improper line-feed may appear.
Save the data as Unicode text (extension .txt).
Importing the converted file using NS-Designer completes creation of the multi-language display screen. Transfer it to the PT and confirm whether the input labels can be displayed correctly in each language by switching labels.
1. Create the screen data in English beforehand.
Open the Settings Menu and set the
No. of Labels
field in the Project Property Dialog Box to 2 min.
2. After creating the screen data, export the project data to a CSV file.
•
Select
Export CSV File
from the File Menu.
13-12
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
The following screen will be displayed. Select
Unicode
for the output code. the Button and specify the name of the file to be exported. Finally, click the
Save
Button to complete exporting the data to the CSV file.
3. Exported CSV files are read using Excel. Select
Open
from the File Menu in Excel and then select the CSV file to be edited in the dialog box. Specify
Text Files
in the
Files of type
field, and then open the selected file.
13-13
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
The will open. Select the format of the original data in the
Original data type
field and click the
Next >
Button to proceed to the next step.
Deselect in the
Delimiters
field, and select
Comma
. Click the
Next >
Button to proceed to the next step.
Select all the rows in the
Data preview
field, and select
Text
in the
Column data format
field.
13-14
Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
Input the translation details below the cell of the label name corresponding to the language to be used in the display.
After editing is completed, save the file. Specify
Unicode Text
in the
Files of type
field.
4. Import text files using NS-Designer. Always check whether the project is the pre-edited version before importing the file. When the dialog box for completing the import operation is displayed, screen creation allowing multiple display languages will be completed.
Open the project again with NS-Designer. When the label is switched, the translated version of the label will be displayed.
13-15
Section 13 Multi-language Display
Original language
13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens
Translated language
13-16
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
These appendices provide reference information for using the NS-Designer. Refer to them as required.
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Appendix 9
Quick Reference ......................................................................................................................... A-1
Objects ...................................................................................................................................... A-12
Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................ A-16
Version Information.................................................................................................................. A-17
Resource Report........................................................................................................................ A-18
Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... A-19
Connecting Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. A-26
Details of CLK Status ............................................................................................................... A-28
Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products ....................................... A-31
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
This appendix lists where to look for information on the various functions of the NS-Designer.
"Programming Manual" refers to the
NS Series Programming Manual
(Cat. No. [email protected] ) and "Cross
Reference" refers to the
NS Series Cross-Reference
provided on the NS-Designer CD.
Fixed objects
Video display
Text display
Item
Displaying lines, arrows, and polylines
Displaying rectangles
Fixed Object - Rectangle
Displaying triangles, trapezoids, diamonds, and other polygons
Fixed Object - Polygon
Procedure
Fixed Object - Line
or
Polyline
Displaying circles and ovals
Fixed Object - Circle/Oval
Displaying an arc
Displaying a sector
Fixed Object - Arc
Fixed Object - Sector
Filling fixed objects
Reference
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Section 5-2
Tiling Tab Page on the Fixed Object Properties Dialog Box (
Settings - Object Properties
)
Programming
Manual Section 2-6
Displaying bitmap data Display a bitmap object (
Functional Object - Bitmap
).
JPEG files can also be displayed.
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Section 5-13
Using the same fixed object in more than one application
Displaying special symbols and characters
Displaying the same graphic in many locations or on many screens
Changing displayed objects according to specified conditions
1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in the library using
Tools - Register Library.
2. Display the library object using
Tools - Use Library.
1. Create image data using a BMP or JPEG file.
2. Display a bitmap object (
Functional Object - Bitmap
).
1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in the library using
Tools - Register Library.
2. Display the library object using
Tools - Use Library.
1. Create bitmap objects (
Functional Object - Bitmap
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Section 5-13
Programming
2. Indirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is
Manual Sec-
displayed based on PLC or PT status.
tion 2-12
Displaying video images
Displaying text that does not change
Changing displayed text based on PLC status
1. Display a word button object (
Functional Object - Word Button
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
2. Set
Select shape
for the button shape on the General Tab
Page.
3. Set the shapes to be displayed when the button is pressed, when it is not pressed, and when the set value matches on the Color/Shape Tab Page.
Display the images using a video display object (
Object – Video Display
).
Display the text with a text object (
Functional
Functional Object - Text
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Use a String Display and Input object (
String Display & Input
).
Functional Object -
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
A-1
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Text display
Screen display
Item Procedure Reference
Changing displayed text based on PLC status
Changing the displayed screen using a button
(
1. Create a text object (
Functional Object - Text
).
Programming
2. Select
Indirect Reference of String
on the Label Tab Page.
Manual Sec-
The displayed text will change according to PLC or PT status.
tion 2-12
Create a command button object set to change the screen
Functional Object - Command Button
Screen
Screen n
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
PLC bit status display
Changing the displayed screen when a specified bit turns ON
Switch to a specific screen when a specified bit turns ON using the automatic screen change function in the alarm/event settings (
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
).
Changing to a different screen based on
PLC or PT status when the screen is changed
Change the screen by writing the screen page number to $SW0 in system memory.
($SW0 in system memory contains the current screen page number.)
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-4
Create a command button object set to change the screen
Programming
(
Functional Object - Command Button
) and use indirect screen page number specification from the PLC or NT to control
tion 2-9
the screen page number according to PLC or PT status.
Manual Sec-
Creating screens with other screens overlaid
Turn ON the
Use as Pop-up Screen
setting on the Size/Pop-up
Tab Page of the screen properties (
Settings - Screen Proper-
on them
ties
).
Section 4-1
Creating a common screen to be used with
1. Create the common portion of the display as a sheet (
File -
Open Sheet
). many other screens
2. Apply the sheet (
File - Apply Sheet
) to display it on the required screens.
Section 4-3
Create the portion to be switched as a frame object (
Functional
Section 4-4
Object - Frame
).
Changing only a portion of the display based on PLC or PT status
Controlling a lamp based on PLC bit
ON/OFF status
Create a bit lamp object (
Functional Object – Bit Lamp
).
PT
Screen
PLC
Programming
Manual Section 2-10
Controlling a displayed object based on PLC bit ON/OFF status
Create bitmap objects (
Functional Objects - Bitmap
) and then indirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is displayed based on PLC status.
1. Create an ON/OFF button object (
Functional Object -
ON/OFF Button
).
2. Select
Select shape
for the button type and then specify the shapes to change to on the Color/Shape Tab Page.
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Changing PLC bit
1. Create an ON/OFF button object (
Functional Object -
status by pressing a
ON/OFF Button
) and set the PLC bit as a write address. button and displaying the status by lighting a
2. Create a bit lamp object (
Functional Object - Bit Lamp
) and set the display address to the same PLC bit. lamp
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
A-2
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
PLC bit status display
PLC word status display
Item Procedure Reference
Controlling displayed text based on PLC bit
ON/OFF status
1. Create an ON/OFF button object (
ON/OFF Button
).
Functional Object -
Programming
Manual Sec-
2. Turn ON the
Switch Labels for Address ON/OFF
setting on the Text Tab Page of the Properties Setting Dialog Box. Then
tion 2-9
select
Link with the Specified Address ON/OFF
and set the
PLC bit.
PT
Screen
PLC
ABC
DEF
When ON
Bit
When OFF
Controlling displayed text based on PLC bit
ON/OFF status
Create a text object and select
Indirect Reference of String
on the Label Tab Page. The displayed text will change according to
Manual Sec-
ON/OFF status of the PLC bit.
Programming tion 2-12
Displaying an alarm or 1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event event message based on PLC bit ON/OFF status settings (
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
).
2. To display one line, create an alarm/event display object
(
Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Display
) and to display a list, create an alarm/event summary history object (
Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
PT
Screen
Alarm/Event Summary History
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
•
•
Alarm/Event Setting
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
•
•
PLC
Alarm/Event Display
Recording a history of
PLC bit ON/OFF status, saving it in the
PT, and displaying it for confirmation
Alarm /Event2
1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event settings (
Settings - Alarm/Event Setting
).
2. Create an alarm/event summary history object (
Functional
Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History
).
3. Select
Alarm history
for the display data on the General Tab
Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
PT
Screen
Alarm/Event Summary
History
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
Alarm/Event Setting
Alarm /Event1
Alarm /Event2
•
•
•
•
PLC
Displaying numeric data
Use a numeral display and input object (
Functional Object -
Numeral Display & Input
). To prevent input, turn ON
Display
Expansion Tab
on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property
Setting Dialog Box and disable input.
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Displaying a level meter
Displaying an analogue meter
Create a level meter object (
Functional Object - Level Meter
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
Create an analogue meter object (
Functional Object - Analogue Meter
).
Programming
Manual Section 2-12
A-3
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
PLC word status display
Item
Displaying a brokenline graph
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Procedure
Create a broken-line graph object (
Functional Object - Broken-line Graph
).
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-15
Displaying text string data
Displaying a data log graph
Create a String Display and Input object (
Functional Object -
String Display & Input
). To prevent input, turn ON
Display
Expansion Tab
on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property
Setting Dialog Box and disable input.
Create a data log graph object (
Functional Object - Data Log
Graph
).
Changing the color of a lamp based on PLC word status
Create a word lamp object (
Functional Object - Word Lamp
).
The lamp can be switched among 10 colors.
Displaying detailed information and countermeasures by pressing an alarm/event summary history object
1. Turn ON the
Write Alarm ID to the Specified Address
setting on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for an alarm/event summary history object (
Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History
) and set a write address for the PLC word.
2. Create text objects (
Functional Object - Text
).
3. Select indirect specification of the text string on the Text Tab
Page and set the same PLC word as set in step 1.
When an alarm or event occurs, an ID number will be written to the specified address and the text will be changed according to the value of the number.
NS
PLC
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Programming
Manual Section 2-14
Programming
Manual Section 2-10
Programming
Manual Section 2-13
2.
ID write
Display
1.
2.
3
ID reference
Text string file
Label
Writing data to the PLC
Alarm/Event
Summary & History
Displaying recipe data 1. Create a data block table object (
Functional Object – Data
Block Table
).
Turning ON/OFF a
PLC from the PT
2. Set the data block to be displayed on the General Tab Page of the Property Settings Dialog Box.
Create a button that will turn ON/OFF the specified bit using an
ON/OFF button object (
Functional Object - ON/OFF Button
).
PT
Programming
Manual Section 2-16
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Screen
PLC
ON/OFF
Bit address
A-4
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Writing data to the PLC
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Item
Inputting numbers from a tenkey
Procedure
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input
).
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input property settings, set either
Standard system keypad
or
Large standard system keypad
as the input method.
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Writing a constant with one button
1. Create a word button object (
ton
).
Functional Object - Word But-
2. Select
Set Value
for the button operation on the General Tab
Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
PT
Screen
PLC
123 123
Numeral Display & Input
Word Button
Incrementing or decrementing a
1. Create a word button object (
ton
).
Functional Object - Word But-
value with buttons
2. Select
Increment/Decrement
for the button operation on the
General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Set a negative value to decrement.
Inputting a value from a pop-up window
Inputting a value from a pop-up window
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
ject - Numeral Display & Input
).
Functional Ob-
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box, select
Input from Pop-up Screen
.
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Create a command button object on the specified pop-up window (
Functional Object - Command Button
).
Programming
Manual Sec-
Set
Key button
on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting
tion 2-9
Dialog Box.
Inputting from thumbwheel switches
Create thumbwheel switch object (
Functional Object -
Thumbwheel Switch
).
PT
Screen
PLC
-
1
+
-
2 3
+ +
123
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Inputting from a virtual keyboard
1. Create a String Display and Input object (
Functional Object
- String Display & Input
).
2. On the Keyboard Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog
Box, set either
Standard system keypad
or
Large standard system keypad
.
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Transferring a text string to a specific object when a button is pressed
1. Create a command button object (
Functional Object -
Command Button
).
2. Select
Keyboard
for the function selection on the General
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
3. To send a set string, select
Specification of String
.
Specified string
and to send a string that depends on the value of an address, select
Indirect
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Writing recipe data to PLCs
1. Create a data block table object (
Functional Object - Data
Block Table
).
2. Set the data block to be written on the General Tab Page of the Property Settings Dialog Box.
Programming
Manual Section 2-16
A-5
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Writing data to the PLC
Item
Disabling writing numeral or text strings from PLC operations
Procedure
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input
) or create a string display and input object (
Functional Object - String Display & Input
).
2. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Control Flag Tab
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set
Enable input on other screens
to
Indirect
. The specific bit can be used to enable and disable writing from the numeral display and input object or the string display and input object.
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Input
PT
Screen
Numeral input field
456
PLC
Bit OFF
Functional objects with buttons
Creating an original 1. Create a command button object (
Functional Object -
tenkey and registering it as a library object
Command Button
).
2. Set
Key button
on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to send the specified text string or command code to the input field for the specified functional object.
Section 5-13
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
3. Select the entire tenkey and select
Tools - Register Library.
PT
Screen
Number input field
Input
123
7 8
4
1
０
5
2
．
9
6
3
CL
+-
↑
↓
↵
Command buttons
(key function)
Changing a label using a button
1. Create a word button object (
Functional Object - Word But-
Programming
ton
).
Manual Sections 2-4 and
2. Select
Load Keyboard Screen
for the button operation on the
General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box. Set the set value to the label switch number.
2-9
3. Set the $SW10 as the write address.
($SW0 in system memory contains the current label switch number.)
PT PLC
START START
Screen
English
"1" is written.
Japanese
English
Label switch number 0: Japanese
Label switch number 1: English
$SW10
A-6
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Functional objects with buttons
Item Procedure Reference
Transferring data between PLC words with
1. Create a command button object (
Functional Object -
Command Button
). a button
2. Select
Keyboard
for the function selection on the General
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
3. Select indirect specification of the text string and set the PLC source address.
Programming
Manual Sections 2-9 and
2-11
4. Create a String Display and Input object (
Functional Object
- String Display & Input
).
5. Set the PLC destination address for the address on the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
6. Set the input method to
Other Input Method (command button etc)
on the Keyboard Screen Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
PT
String Display & Input
Screen
ABC
PLC
ABC
Destination
ABC
Source
Stopping the PT's buzzer with a button
Command button (key function)
1. Create a command button object (
Functional Object -
Command Button
).
2. Select
Stop buzzer
for the function selection on the General
Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to stop the buzzer when pressed.
PT
Screen
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Buzzer stopped
Using a button to close or move a popup screen
Command button
(buzzer stop function)
1. Create a command button object (
Command Button
).
Functional Object -
2. Select
Pop-up Screen Control
for the function selection on the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to control the pop-up screen.
Programming
Manual Section 2-9
Disabling a button from a PLC operation
1. Create a button.
2. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Control Flag Tab
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set
Enable input on other screens
to
Indirect
. The specific address can be used to enable and disable writing the specified address from
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
the button.
PT
Screen
PLC
Bit OFF
Input disabled
ON/OFF button, work button, or command button
A-7
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Item Procedure
Numeral display and input and thumbwheel switches
Displaying a tenkey in a pop-up screen by touching a numeral display and input object
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input
).
2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input property settings, set either
Standard system keypad
Large standard system keypad
as the input method. or
PT
Screen
Numeral input field
123
Input
Reference
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
Placing more than one
1. Create a table object (
Functional Object - Table
). numeral display and input object on the
2. Set the movement direction for the
Enter Key
Focus Move Direction by
setting on the Property Setting Dialog Box for the same screen and table. moving the focus between them by pressing the Enter Key
Section 5-1
Restricting the range of numbers that can be input
Numeral Displaying the unit of display and input a numeric value and setting the scale for numeric data
Operations
Changing the screen grid
Copying objects that have been created
Automatically setting different addresses when copying and pasting functional objects
Operations
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input
) or create a thumbwheel switch object (
Functional Object - Thumbwheel Switch
).
2. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Max/Min Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the range of numbers that can be input.
Programming
Manual Section 2-11
1. Create a numeral display and input object (
ject - Numeral Display & Input
).
Functional Ob-
Programming
Manual Sec-
2. Select
Unit
or
Scale
on the General Tab Page in the Property
Setting Dialog Box.
tion 2-11
Layout - Grid
1. Select the object to be copied.
2. Select
Edit - Copy.
3. Select
Edit – Paste.
Use ing.
Edit – Offset Paste
to specify the offset value when past-
Reusing screen data 1. Create a new screen (
File – New Screen
2. In the New Screen Dialog Box, select
).
Reuse Exiting Screen.
3. Select the project containing the screen to be reused in the
Reuse Exiting Screen Dialog Box.
Reusing screen data
4. Select the screen to reuse from the screen list.
To reuse a screen from the same project when creating a new screen, use
File - Select Template Project.
1. Select the screen to be copied.
2. Select
Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects.
3. Select
Edit - Copy.
4. Open the destination screen.
5. Select
Edit - Paste.
Section 4-1
Section 5-4
Section 5-4
Section 4-2
Section 3-7
Section 5-4
A-8
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Operations
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Item Procedure
Grouping multiple objects as one object
1. Select all of the objects to group.
2. Select
Layout - Group.
Note: To return grouped objects to individual objects, select
Layout – Ungroup
.
Specifying an object behind another object
Try clicking in a different position to select the object behind.
Reference
Section 5-5
Section 5-4
Accurately aligning the positions of objects
1. Select the object in front.
2. Select
Layout - Order - Bring to Back.
3. Select the object that was previously behind.
1. Select all of the objects to be aligned.
2. Select
Layout - Align/Distribution
and then select the alignment method.
Section 5-5
Section 5-5
Changing a range of
PLC bits or words set for functional objects
Setting a range or comments, labels, or
PLC bits/words for functional objects
Pasting colors set for existing functional objects or fixed objects to other functional objects or fixed objects
Use the replacement function (
Edit - Replace
) to change a range of bits or words set for functional objects.
Section 5-4
1. Select the functional objects to be set. They must all be of the
Section 5-10
same type.
2. Use
Settings - Change Settings at Once.
1. Export the functional object property settings to a CSV file using
File - Export CSV File.
Section 12
2. Use spreadsheet software to set the properties.
3. Import the modified CSV file to NS-Designer using
File - Import CSV File.
1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the color format.
2. Click the
Color Copy/Paste
Button on the Color Toolbar.
3. Click on the destination object.
Pasting the label font formats from an exist-
1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the label font format. ing functional object to
2. Click the
Copy/Paste Font
Button on the Font Toolbar. another functional
3. Click on the destination object. object
Using an object that has been created in another screen or project
1. Select the object and register it in the library (
Library
2. Use
).
Tool - Use Library
Tool - Register
to position the object on the screen.
Section 2-5
Section 5-13
Creating multiple functional objects of the same type
1. Create the objects in a table object (
Functional Object - Table
).
Confirming PLC bit and word status
2. Select the type of object to be created in the table as the
Table type
in the Property Setting Dialog Box.
Used
Tool - List Up Addresses Used.
Checking the number of objects used on each screen
Use
Tools - List Up Functional Objects Used.
Finding addresses, comments, labels, or
PLC bits/words set for functional object.
Use
Edit - Find.
Reordering screens
Use the
Move Up
and
Screen Maintenance.
Move Down
Buttons under
Tools -
Section 2-5
Section 5-1
Section 5-11
Section 5-9
Section 5-4
Section 4-2
A-9
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Operations
Item
Copying screens
Procedure
Select the screen to copy and click the
Duplicate
Button under
Tools - Screen Maintenance.
Reference
Section 4-2
Deleting screens Select the screen to delete and click the
Delete
Button under
Tools - Screen Maintenance.
Use
View - Simulate ON/OFF.
Section 4-2
Checking the ON/OFF status of objects on screens created on the NS-Designer
Checking addresses set for functional objects on screens created on the NS-Designer
Use
View - Show Address.
Section 4-1
Section 4-1
Switching labels set for functional objects on screens created on the NS-Designer
Select the label to display under
View - Switch Label.
Switch between labels by selecting
Previous Label
or
Next
Label
from the object creation toolbar.
Use
Tools - Functional Object List.
Section 4-1
Section 4-1
Checking the settings of functional objects on a list
Finding duplicated settings of
PLC bits and words
Finding setting errors
Used
Tool - Address Cross Reference.
Section 5-9
Section 5-12
Displaying objects for which errors were detected in validation so that they can be easily found
Displaying the time and date
Use
Tools - Validation.
Use
View - Show Error Object.
Section 9
Section 4-1
Use
Functional Object - Date/Time.
Programming
Manual Section 2-17
Section 3-9
Selecting the language used for the PT’s system menus and dialog boxes
Select the language on the Select Language Tab Page of the
Project Property Dialog Box (
Settings
-
Project properties
).
Setting the time and date to display
1. Create a time/data object (
Functional Object - Date/Time
).
3. Input a new time and date into the dialog box to change the time and date.
2. Click the object during PT operation. A dialog box will appear to set the time and date.
Programming
Manual Section 2-17
Screen
2000/06/02
2000.06.02
Requiring passwords to input data for functional objects
Displaying a message dialog box when data is input for functional objects
1. Set the passwords under
Settings - Password Setting.
2. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Password Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the level of password to request.
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
1. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Write Setting Tab
Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional object and turn ON
Display confirmation dialog when writing
.
2. Select
User Specified Message.
3. Click the
Edit Message
Button and set the desired message in the Message Setting Dialog Box.
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
Making functional objects flash 1. Make the settings for each flicker number under
Settings -
Flicker Setting.
2. Turn ON
Display Expansion Tab
on the Flicker Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional object and set the flicker number.
Programming
Manual Section 2-8
A-10
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 1 Quick Reference
Item
Making fixed objects flash
Testing project data offline
Copying project data
Procedure
Use the Duplicate Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Box (
File - Project Maintenance
).
Reference
Use the Flicker Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for each object.
Programming
Manual Section 2-6
Use
Tool - Test.
Section 8
Section 3-8
Section 3-8
Deleting project data
Backing up project data
Use the Delete Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Box (
File - Project Maintenance
).
Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Box (
File - Project Maintenance
).
Restoring a project from backup data
Use the Restore Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Box (
File - Project Maintenance
).
Section 3-8
Section 3-8
Copying project data to a floppy disk
Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog
Box (
File - Project Maintenance
) and specify a floppy disk as the backup location.
Use the macro function. Performing calculations on the
PT
Changing the model of the NSseries PT
Use
Settings - Change PT Model.
Section 3-8
Section 6-1
Section 3-10
A-11
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Switches
Object name
DIP switch, horizontal
DIP switch, vertical
Seesaw 1
Seesaw 2
Shape
Appendix 2 Objects
Seesaw 3
Selector
Micro switch 1
Micro switch 2
Lever
Pushbutton, round
Shape changes with status of address
ON
OFF
A-12
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type Object name
Shape changes with status of address
ON
OFF
Lamps Round
Shape changes with status of address
Octagon
Shape changes with status of address
Square
Shape changes with status of address
ON
OFF
Level meter
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Others Frame 1
Frame 2
Actuator
Graph
Shape
Appendix 2 Objects
A-13
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Others
Object name
Conveyor
Dialog box
Robot 1
Robot 2
Others
Shape
Appendix 2 Objects
Pipes and
Valves
Audio Switch
Tank
Valve (Handle)
Valve (Relief)
Pipe
Blower
A-14
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Object type
Pipes and
Valves
Object name
Hopper
Pump
Symbols Basic
Check Box
Arrow
Valve
Pipe
Shape
Appendix 2 Objects
Pump
A-15
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 3 Shortcut Keys
The following shortcut keys can be used with the NS-Designer.
Edit
Menu
File
Display
Settings
Layout
Tools
Function
New Screen
Open Screen
Save Screen
Transfer Data
Undo
Redo
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + I
Ctrl + P
Ctrl + Z
Ctrl + Y
Shortcut keys
Cut
Copy
Paste
Offset Paste Ctrl + W
Delete Delete
Find Ctrl + F
Replace
All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects
Same Functional Objects
Previous Screen
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
Ctrl + H
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + D (when object is selected)
Shift + PageUp
Next Screen
Previous Frame Page
Next Frame Page
Shift + PageDown
PageUp (when frame is selected)
PageDown (when frame is selected)
Refresh F9
Object Properties Enter (when functional object is selected)
Edit Label Space (when functional object with label setting is selected)
Change Settings as a Batch
Move Up
Move Down
Move Left
Ctrl + K (when functional object is selected)
Up cursor key (when object is selected)
Down cursor key (when object is selected)
Left cursor key (when object is selected)
Move Right
Group
Ungroup
One dot shift
Validation
Validation Result
Functional Object List
Address Cross Reference
Test
Right cursor key (when object is selected)
Ctrl + G (when more than one object is selected)
Ctrl + U (when grouped objects are selected)
Ctrl +
↑
,
→
,
↓
, or
←
(when Snap to Grid is selected)
Ctrl + E
Ctrl + Q
Ctrl + L
Ctrl + R
Ctrl + T
A-16
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 4 Version Information
Information on the version of NS-Designer can be displayed.
Select
Help - About NS-Designer.
The NS-Designer Dialog Box will be displayed. The corresponding NS-Designer version number will be shown in place of x.xx.
Click the
OK
Button to close the dialog box.
A-17
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 5 Resource Report
A resource report can be generated to display the file size of screen and sheet files (extension IPW).
Select
Tools – Resource Report
.
The Resource Report Dialog Box will be displayed.
1
2
No. Item
1 Transfer file information
2
3
4
Percentage used
Free space
Project size
3
4
5
Details
All file names in the project are displayed along with the file byte sizes and whether or not the file can be transferred.
All files that can be transferred are displayed, including project files, screen files, bitmap files used on the screens, text files, etc.
If the PT system version is 1.X, the maximum size of file that can be transferred is 1 Mbyte. Files that can be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as
"OK." Files that cannot be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as
"NG." If the system version is 2.0, there is no restriction on the size of files that can be transferred. Any files that are corrupted will be indicated as "ERR."
The percentage of the allowable project size is displayed.
If the percentage used is larger than 100%, file transfer will not be possible. Delete unnecessary files and data to maintain file sizes at less than 100%.
The available space in the PT with no project data transferred is displayed.
The total size of all files in the project is displayed.
A-18
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
The error messages displayed on the NS-Designer are listed in the following table along with probable countermeasures (in alphabetical order).
Message
Address after replacement is not set.
Address input format is not correct. Input address again using correct format and applicable type (bit, word, etc).
Address is not set.
Address is not set.
Address setting after replacement is not correct.
Address type of start address and end address is not the same.
Address will exceed limit. Pasting aborted.
Background file error.
BMP file of the compressed format is not supported.
Cannot be set because there are already more than 160,000 Always log points.
NS5:
Cannot be set because there are already more then 120,000 Always log points.
Cannot be set because the logging holding capacity has been exceeded for the number of always logging points.
Countermeasure
Correctly designate the
start address after replacement
for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.
Set the address using the correct format. The correct address can be set by using the Address Set Dialog
Box.
Set an address in the Address Dialog Box.
Sets the communications address.
Set the
start address after replacement
to a value within the proper address range.
Set the same type of address for the start address and the end address.
Check the range of addresses that can be set and repeat the operation so that the address range is not exceeded.
Check to see if the background file (BMP or JPEG) is corrupted.
Use a BMP file that is not compressed.
A maximum of 160,000 points can be set to be always logged (120,000 points for the NS5). Change the log timing in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box, reduce the number log points, or delete addresses until there are 160,000 or fewer points.
Cannot create a frame inside a frame.
Cannot create any more frames.
Cannot create any more new screens.
Cannot create any more screens.
Cannot create any more.
Cannot Delete the screen file stored in NS hardware.
Cannot establish connection with specified communications method.
Cannot find any project files in NS hardware.
A maximum of 50,000 points can be set to be always logged. Reduce the number of points to be always logged, i.e., change the logging periods or reduce the number of logs in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog
Box.
Position the frame outside any other frames.
Do not use more than 10 frames on one screen.
Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one project.
Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one project.
Create no more than 500 fields in any one data block.
The project in the PT may be set to read-only. Initialize data using
Screen data region format
on the Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and transfer the whole project.
Check the following items.
PT power supply.
Cable connection.
Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer program and start the PT.)
Make correct settings for unset items and connect again.
Resend the whole project.
A-19
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
Message
Cannot find Project file at NS hardware.
Transmit the whole project again.
Cannot open anymore screens. Close xxx to open new screen. Do you want to save the changes you made to xxx?
Cannot open COM port.
Countermeasure
Resend the whole project.
A maximum of 16 screens can be opened for simultaneous editing. Specify whether or not to save the applicable screen.
Close the other application and try the connection again.
Reset the PT and transmit the whole project again. Cannot perform transmission because the memory for transmission is insufficient.
Reset NS hardware and transmit the whole project again.
Cannot register data to 1 folder anymore.
(Max:4096). Register it to other folder.
Cannot restore to the currently edited project.
Cannot reuse the library object. It contains the function which is not supported in the current system version.
Cannot reuse the screen because the system project of source project is newer than current editing project.
Click the
New Category
Button in the Library Dialog
Box and create a new category to place the objects in.
Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and repeat the operation.
Confirm the version of the screen currently being edited and system versions for which the library object is supported.
Match the version of the source project and the project you are editing, and repeat the operation.
The version can be checked on the
Title
Tab Page of the
Project Properties
under the
Settings
in the NS-
Designer.
Always set screen number 0 as a base screen. Cannot set screen No. 0 as a pop-up screen.
Cannot set this address. Please set other address.
Cannot specify this project as a template because system version is newer than current editing project.
Cannot start up editor. Check the setting at
[Tools]-[Options]-[Editor].
Character string is not set.
Set a correct address.
Match the version of the template project with the project you are editing, and repeat the operation.
The version can be checked on the
Title
Tab Page of the
Project Properties
under the
Settings
in the NS-
Designer.
Specify the editor on the Editor Tab Page under
Tools
- Options
or check the specific executable file to be sure that it is correct.
Set the character string to search for in the Find Dialog
Box.
CSV file xx is not correct.(Line:xx Row:xx) Correct the specified line and row in the specified CSV file and then try and import it again.
Currently edited project cannot be deleted. Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and repeat the operation.
Data block table cannot be created on the frame.
Create data block table objects on normal screens.
Data block table cannot be created on the pop-up screen.
Data block table cannot be created on the sheet.
Data cannot be loaded. Check whether the
IPP file and project folder name are the same.
Use explorer or other search method to check whether a folder exists with the same name as the IPP file name.
A-20
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
Message
Downloading aborted. This Project includes the file which name contains invalid character. The characters that can be used are alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to Z, a to z), dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and.
Check and adjust project file.
End address is not set.
Countermeasure
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.
End page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.
End page No. is smaller than the start page
No.
End sheet number is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.
Error detected at NS hardware. (0x03a7)
Error occurred while writing to a flash memory. Transmission failed.
Exceeding maximum/minimum limit.
Failed to create new folder.
Failed to delete.
Failed to export CSV file.
Failed to get configuration information from the printer for NS-Designer. Settings cannot be performed for the printer.
Failed to import CSV file.
Failed to open communications with the
PLC. CX-Server reported an unknown error.
Failed to read file.
(Data Block (X) CSV File)
Failed to read project file.
Failed to register.
Failed to restore the project.
Failed to save file.
Correctly designate the end address for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.
The end page number is 3,999. Set the end page number to a number between 0 and 3,999.
Set the start page number so that it is smaller than the end page number.
Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to 9.
Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.
Contact your OMRON service representative.
Initialize data using
Screen data region format
on the
Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and transfer the project.
Set a number within the upper and lower limits.
The folder could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk.
Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
The file could not be saved because of insufficient space on the hard disk. Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
This message is displayed when files containing information for printer settings cannot be obtained. Reinstall
NS-Designer.
Check to be sure that the file to be imported is in CSV format and repeat the operation.
Exit Screen Data Transfer of NS-Designer if this message appears on the CX-Server when connecting to the PLC to send the settings for the
Path Through
PLC
.
The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a
CSV data file in the project folder.
The project file may be corrupted. If there is a backup file, restore the project file using the backup file under
Project Maintenance - File - Project Maintenance.
Check to see if the specified category in the library has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
Not have any free space left.
Change the Restore Destination or increase the free space, and repeat the operation.
The file could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk. Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
A-21
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
Message
Failed to write a file.
(Data Block (X) CSV File)
Failed to write to a file. Check the free space and perform writing again.
Network No. is out of range. Set the number from 1 to 127.
No items are selected.
Failed to start the CX-Server.
Failed to process the CX-Server.
Failed to use.
Countermeasure
CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
and uninstall CX-
Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CX-Server.
CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to
Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting
and uninstall CX-
Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CX-Server.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a
CSV data file in the project folder.
The file could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk.
Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.
The file is corrupted. Redo the file using backup data.
Set the output file name for the data log group to a name other than
Trend
.
File check sum error.
The specified filename has already been reserved in the System. Change the filename.
File not found. Please verify the correct file name was given.
File size exceeded the maximum. Please check the project data. (03a9)
File writing error occurred.
Frame size is not set. Please be sure to set this item.
Frame size is out of range. Please set the value from 0 to 16.
Functional objects overlap.
To permit overlapping, change the setting from [Tools]-[Options].
Import data of screen page No. xx is not found in CSV file xx.
Incorrect project is specified. Select correct project.
Incorrect value is set for node address. Set the value from 1 to 254.
Initialization of transmission library failed.
Memory for undoing /redoing operation is insufficient. Increase the free memory by closing other screens or exiting other applications etc.
More than 5,000 items have been set.
Correctly input an existing project name in the Open
Project Dialog Box.
The maximum size file that can be transferred is 1.44
MB. Re-execute the transfer with a file smaller than
1.44 MB.
Increase the available space in the computer.
Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box.
Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box to a number between 0 and
16.
As a rule, set functional objects so that they do not overlap. To permit overlapping, change the setting on the
Edit/Display Tab Page under
Tools - Options.
The number of screens defined in the import data is different from the number in the project into which the data is being imported. If there are fewer screens in the import data, temporarily move the extra screen files to a separate folder and repeat the operation.
Correctly input an existing project name for project maintenance.
Set an integer within the specified range for the node address in the Edit Host Dialog Box.
Reinstall the NS-Designer.
Increase the free memory by closing other screens or exiting other applications and then repeating the operation.
The maximum number of alarm/events that can be registered is 5,000. Reduce the number of alarms and events to 5,000 or less by deleting unneeded ones from the Alarm/Event Setting Dialog Box.
Set an integer within the specified range for the network number in the Edit Host Dialog Box.
Select an item and repeat the operation.
A-22
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
Message
No. of Address to find is out of range.
No. of functional objects inside a table exceeds the maximum limit (256).
Countermeasure
Reset the address to search for within the allowable range of addresses.
Reduce the number of items horizontally or vertically in the Table Setting Dialog Box so that the total number of functional objects is 256 or less.
Contact your OMRON service representative.
Restart the PT and make the new connection.
NS hardware error.
NS hardware is already connected. Restart the NS hardware to change the communication method.
Operation failed.
Other project exists in this directory. Cannot create new one.
Please ensure that the maximum limit is not smaller than minimum limit.
Please enter an integer between oo and oo.
Project cannot be specified as project name because it is being edited with NS-
Designer, which has been started up already
Project file differs between transmission source and destination. Select the whole project and perform transmission again.
Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.
Specify another folder or create a new folder in which to save the project file.
The lower limit is higher than the upper limit. Make the correct limit settings.
Input an integer within the specified range.
Specify another project name, or stop editing the project with NS-Designer and save the project.
Project file name contains invalid character.
Usable characters are alphanumeric (0-9,
A-Z, a-z), dollar mark ($), underscore (_) and.
Project file name is too long. It should be within 42 characters.
Project name is not set.
Restore source data does not exist. Check the data.
Screen is not open.
Screen page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.
Screen size of download project is incorrect.
Set PT Memory ($B/$W) both for $SB/$SW
Allocation Address or set host memory (DM etc.) both for them.
Setting is not completed. Please be sure to set this item.
Individual screen data cannot be transferred for a different project when a project already exists in the PT
(or in the specified Memory Card bank). To transfer the screen data, transfer the entire project.
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.
There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.
Specify the name of the project file to be processed.
Correctly input an existing project name for project maintenance.
Check to see if the specification for the restore source is correct.
Either select the entire project for the
Check When
setting on the Error Check Dialog Box or open the screens to be checked and repeat the operation.
Set the screen number to a number between 0 and
3,999.
Mount Expansion Memory to the PT or take other steps to increase the available memory in the PT.
Alternately, reduce the size of the screen data being transferred.
The screen data size can be confirmed using
Tools -
Resource Report.
Set the addresses for both $SB and $SW to PT memory addresses ($B and $W) or set them both to host memory addresses for the same host.
Specify a data block.
A-23
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
dress.
Message
Start address is larger than the end ad-
Start address is not set.
Start address setting is not correct.
Start page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.
Sheet page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.
Specified file name contains invalid characters:
Alphanumeric (A-Z,a-z,0-9), underscore
(_), dollar mark ($), and period (,).
Specify the file name within 12 characters
(8+3 format).
The selected PT model and System Version do NOT match.
The setting data format is different.
The start sheet number is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.
The value is out of range.
The version of CSV file is newer than the project you are editing. Import CSV file cannot be performed.
Countermeasure
Set the sheet page number to a number between 0 and 9.
The specified file name contains illegal characters.
Change the file name to one that uses only the following characters.
Alphanumerics (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), underscores (_), dollar signs ($), and periods (.).
Specify a file name of 12 characters or less (8+3 format) when specifying file names in dialog boxes used to set properties, e.g., when making list selections.
Set the start address so that it is smaller than the end address.
Correctly designate the start address for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.
Set a correct address.
Screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to
3,999.
Set the screen page number to a number between 0 and 3,999.
Stop the test tool and then restart it. Test Tool is already started up. Cannot start Test.
The address is out of range.
The capacity of NS hardware is insufficient.
Transmission failed.
The data is created with NS-Designer Ver.
1.0. This needs to be converted to edit with
NS-Designer Ver. 6.2. When you convert the data to NS-Designer V1.1, it also can be operated with the system version 1.0.
Do you want to convert the data?
Set an address that is within range in the Address Dialog Box.
Reduce the amount of screen data and transfer the project again.
You are attempting to use NS-Designer Ver. 6.2 to edit a project that was saved using NS-Designer Ver. 1.0.
To convert the data from Ver. 1.0 to Ver. 1.1, which can be edited using NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, click the
Yes Button. To leave the data unconverted, click the
No Button and edit the project using NS-Designer Ver.
1.0.
Input a file name in the correct format. The file name is incorrect. Input correct file name.
The number of characters exceed the limit.
Set characters no more than X characters.
The object that cannot be arranged on the pop-up screen is contained.
Set no more than the specified number of characters.
Screens with video display objects or data block tables cannot be converted to pop-up screens. Either delete the video display objects and data block tables or do not perform the pop-up screen setting.
Select a PT model and System Version that match.
Refer to
Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different
Versions of NS-series Products
for details on supported combinations.
Check the data block field storage format and the setting data format.
Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to 9.
Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.
Input a value within the correct range.
Check the NS-Designer version being used, upgrade to match the version of the CSV file, as required, and then import the CSV file again.
A-24
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 6 Error Messages
Message
This object can be created only one for each screen.
This program is already started up.
Time-out error occurred.
Check the cable. Perform transmission again after restarting NS hardware.
To reference a string indirectly, set both
File Name and Address for Selecting a
Line.
Total No. of Always log addresses exceeds the maximum limit of 50.
Total number of functional object will exceed the limit. Cannot continue operation.
Countermeasure
Only one video display object or data block table can be created per screen.
Multiple copies of the transfer program cannot be started. Use the transfer program that is already started.
Check the following items.
PT power supply.
Cable connection.
Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer program and start the PT.)
When transferring via serial communications, check the communications cable and the COM port that is being used. When using Ethernet, make sure that a PT with the node address specified for the transfer actually exists.
Specify both a file name for storing the text string and an address for specifying the file line on the Label Tab
Page in the Text Property Setting Dialog Box.
A maximum of 50 addresses can be set for standing logging. Either change the log timing in the Data Log
Group Setting Dialog Box or delete addresses that have been registered until there are 50 or fewer Always log addresses.
Do not use more than 1,024 functional objects on one screen.
Finding Out the Number of Functional Objects
The number of functional objects that is being used can be found using
Tools –
List Up Functional Objects Used.
Check the destination node.
Create video display objects on normal screens.
Transfer already in progress.
Video display cannot be created on the frame object.
Video display cannot be created on the pop-up screen.
Video display cannot be created on the sheet.
A-25
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications
There are three methods that can be used for data communications between the NS-Designer (computer) and the NS-series PT.
•
•
•
Serial communications
Ethernet
Memory Cards
Refer to the following information when preparing a connecting cable for the NS-Designer. A cable is not required if Memory Cards are going to be used.
The cable is wired as described next depending on the type of RS-232C connector on the computer being connected.
•
Computers with a 25-pin Connector
Computer side PT tool connector
Shield wire
Connector hood Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Model
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901
XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911
AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG
Remarks
25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)
Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)
A-26
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
•
Computers with a 9-pin Connector
Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications
Computer side PT tool connector
Shield wire
Connector hood
Connector hood
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Model
XM2D-0901
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0913
AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG
Remarks
9-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)
9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)
9-pin mm-pitch screw by OMRON
9-pin inch-pitch screw by OMRON
Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)
Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)
Note: Use a connector hood on the computer-end connector with screws that match the specifications of the connector on the computer.
•
Ethernet Connector Pin Arrangement
1
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
8
1
2
3
Pin number
TD+
TD
−
RD+
Signal name
4 NC
5 NC
6
RD
−
7 NC
8 NC
Name
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
A-27
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
Address
(start address = n)
n
Bit Status
0 to 7
8
9
10
11
12
Error Information
Contents
Not used
1: Node address setting range error
1: Duplicate node address
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Hardware error
1: Communications controller send error n + 1 n + 2
15
0 to 7
8 to 15
Polling Node Address,
Startup Node Address
1: Error log exists
1: Polling node address
1: Startup node address n + 3 n + 4 n + 6
15
0 to 14
15
Local Data Link Participation
Status
Node 32
(Reserved)
Not used
0: Local node data link not participating or data link inactive
1: Local node data link participating
A-28
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Address
(start address = n)
n + 7
Bit Status
Data Link Status n + 8 n + 9 n + 10 n + 11 n + 12 n + 13 n + 14 n + 15 n + 16 n + 17 n + 18 n + 19 n + 20 n + 21 n + 22
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 8
Node 9
Node 10
Node 11
Node 12
Node 13
Node 14
Node 15
Node 16
Node 17
Node 18
Node 19
Node 20
Node 21
Node 22
Node 23
Node 24
Node 25
Node 26
Node 27
Node 28
Node 29
Node 30
Node 31
Node 32
Contents
n + 23
15
A-29
Node 16
Appendices
NS-Designer Operation Manual
Address
(start address = n)
n + 24
Bit Status
Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status
Contents
Node 32 n + 25
15 n + 26
15 Node 16
15
A-30
Node 32
Appendices Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The following tables show the data compatibility between different versions of NS-series products.
The versions of the system program that can be installed in the PT vary with the model. The possible combinations are shown in the following table. Use a system program that can be installed for the hardware used.
NS5-V2
System Program Ver. 1.X
System Program Ver. 2.X
System Program Ver. 3.X
System Program Ver. 4.X
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
V1/NS5-V1
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported (except for the NS5-V1)
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
System Program Ver. 5.X
System Program Ver. 6.0
System Program Ver. 6.2 Not supported Supported Supported
The versions of screen data that can be used on the PT depend on the version of the system program installed there. The “screen data version” is the version of the program selected when screen data is created on NS-Designer. The combinations that can be used on the PT are shown in the following table. Screen data versions are upwardly compatible.
Item System
Program
Ver. 1.X
System
Program
Ver. 2.X
System
Program
Ver. 3.X
System
Program
Ver. 4.X
System
Program
Ver. 5.X
System
Program
Ver. 6.0
System
Program
Ver. 6.2
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Screen data version: Ver. 1.X
Screen data version: Ver. 2.X
Screen data version: Ver. 3.X
Screen data version: Ver. 4.X
Screen data version: Ver. 5.X
Screen data version: Ver. 6.0
Screen data version: Ver. 6.2
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported
Not supported
Supported
A-31
Appendices Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products
NS-Designer Operation Manual
The versions of screen data that can be read and created depend on the NS-Designer version. Convert the data as required with NS-Designer before reading it.
Item
Screen data version: Ver. 1.X
Screen data version: Ver. 2.X
NS-
Designer
Ver. 1.X
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 2.X
Conversion to screen data version 2.X required
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 3.X
Conversion to screen data version 2.X required
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 4.X
Conversion to screen data version 2.X required
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 5.X
Reading supported
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 6.0
Reading supported
Reading supported
NS-
Designer
Ver. 6.2
Reading supported
Reading supported
Screen data version: Ver. 3.X
Screen data version: Ver. 4.X
Screen data version: Ver. 5.X
Screen data version: Ver. 6.0
Screen data version: Ver. 6.2
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading not supported
Reading not supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading not supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
Reading supported
A-32
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual.
Cat. No.
V074-E1-07
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
01 May 2002 Original production
Addition of Switch Box function
Contents revised to reflect the upgrade from version 2.0 to version 3.0
Addition of information related to the printing function
Addition of information related to “V1” models
Addition of information related to other version upgrades
06 February 2005 grade.
Addition of information related to NS5 PTs.
Addition of information related to NS-Designer Ver. 6.0 upgrade.
Addition of information related to the NS5-V2 Series.
Addition of information related to other version upgrades.
07 October
Notice:
Information on general precautions notation and copyright added before page P-1.
Read and Understand this Manual:
Information on liability and warranty added after P-3.
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. V074-E1-07 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
Below is a list of articles with direct links to our shop Electric Automation Network where you can see:
• Quote per purchase volume in real time.
• Online documentation and datasheets of all products.
• Estimated delivery time enquiry in real time.
• Logistics systems for the shipment of materials almost anywhere in the world.
• Purchasing management, order record and tracking of shipments.
To access the product, click on the green button.
Product
Control system, CPU 640 E / S 20Kpasos 32KW
Control system, CPU 1280 Simplex E / S 30 KW 64 KW Data
Program
Control system, CPU 960 Simplex E / S 10KW 64 KW Data
Program
Operator Interface, ControllerLink card terminal NS10 /
12/15
Control system, CPU 160 E / S 5Kpasos 32KW
Operator interface, video input card for NS8 / 10/12/15, 2 channels + RGB
Control system, CPU 320 E / S 10Kpasos 32KW
Code
184020
Reference
CJ1M-CPU13
168305
168304
CS1D-
CPU44S
CS1D-
CPU42S
113739 NS-CLK21
184018 CJ1M-CPU11
180451 NS-CA002
184019 CJ1M-CPU12
113370 PT11
Basis for relay Base LY 11 pins 10A solder terminals
Operator interface, video input card for NS8 / 10/12, 4
Channels NTSC / PAL
147027 NS-CA001
Product link
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
Buy on EAN
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
© 2021